JP6493377B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the conventional game machine, variable display of the symbols is performed in the display device, by being stopped and displayed in the combination symbol is predetermined, it is advantageous those or player to the player is awarded. In addition to the symbols, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes. As a result, the display contents were diversified to improve the interest.

JP 2003-325886 A

  However, further improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination condition. A determination unit capable of determining the information stored in the storage unit based on the establishment, a display unit dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a display unit When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, it is stored in the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. A symbol display unit for displaying a symbol corresponding to each of the information on the display unit, and a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied. Based on the result of the determination performed by the prior determination unit, the determination by the prior determination unit, the specific condition determination unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied, Variable display means for changing a display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means, and a first background mode in which the symbol is displayed as a background mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit A background mode determining unit that determines a background mode for determining one background mode from the plurality of background modes including at least the second background mode in which the symbol is not displayed, and the background mode determining unit determines the background mode The display mode of the design is variable by the background mode display means for displaying the background mode corresponding to the background mode that has been displayed on the display means, and the variable display means. Information in a state that is displayed, when the display by varying the second background embodiment by the background mode display means, the identification information about the symbol which was displayed are varied in area to be dynamically displayed Specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode that can be identified.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit that satisfies the determination condition Discriminating means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means, display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the specific discrimination result on the display means When the identification information based on the fact is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. Symbol display means for displaying symbols corresponding to each on the display means, and prior discrimination for executing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied And a specific condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied based on a result of determination by the prior determination means, and the symbol display means when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied Variable display means for changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the first background mode in which the symbol is displayed as the background mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit, and the symbol A background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining one background aspect from a plurality of the background aspects including at least a second background aspect that is not displayed, and the background determined by the background mode determining means A background mode display unit that displays a background mode corresponding to a mode on the display unit, and a state in which the display mode of the symbol is displayed by the variable display unit. In the case where it is displayed by varying the second background embodiment by the background mode display means, wherein the identification information is capable of identifying information about the symbol which was displayed are varied in area to be dynamically displayed specific Specific mode display means capable of displaying the mode.

Therefore , there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the display means is configured by a liquid crystal display, so that it is possible to display various display modes. .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a control unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of a restriction unit, (b) is a rear view of the restriction unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the restriction unit taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII part of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVa-XXIVa line of Fig.23 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of Fig.23 (b), (C) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line | wire of FIG.23 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the front cover in the XXXIB-XXXIb line | wire of Fig.31 (a). (A) is a top view of a reflector, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the reflector in the XXXIIb-XXXIIb line | wire of Fig.32 (a). (A) is a top view of a rotation unit, FIG.33 (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in the XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb line | wire of (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation unit in the XXXIV section of Drawing 33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLa-XLa line | wire of Fig.39 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLb-XLb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 43 XLVc-XLVc line, (d) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the control unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along the XLIXc-XLIXc line in FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIa-LIIIa line of FIG. 52, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIb-LIIIb line of FIG.52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the distribution apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVb-LVb line | wire of FIG. 55 (a), (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line | wire of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically operation | movement of the rotation unit in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lighting aspect by the rotation unit in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the mimetic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the eight reservation effects in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special pressing effect of the eight hold effects in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub-display area | region at the time of eight hold | maintenance effects in the 1st control example being performed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub-display area | region at the time of eight hold | maintenance effects in the 1st control example being performed. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in a 1st control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for non-normal in a 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the press time notice selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the back surface switching table in a 1st control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special back surface switching table in a 1st control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the continuous notice lottery table in a 1st control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production | presentation upper limit frequency table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation execution determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the control process at the time of a press performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special alarm | sound setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the rotation display operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting setting update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed this command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command reception process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special back surface setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch effect selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice command processing which is done. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is done. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the various image setting processes performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically operation | movement of the rotation unit in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the rotation display operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting setting update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the reel production performed during the jackpot game in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the reel production performed during the jackpot game in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning information storage area in case the continuous short reach production in the 2nd control example is performed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in case the continuous short reach production in the 2nd control example is performed. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the short reel production | presentation selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the long reel production | presentation selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reel production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the opening effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special back surface setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reel effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the transition production | presentation command process. It is the flowchart which showed the giving effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the production | presentation aspect of the reservation notice effect performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the production | presentation aspect of the reservation notice effect performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the pending | holding advance notice execution determination table in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command reception process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the third control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the third control example. 6 is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing 3. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the back surface D transition performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the completion | finish of the back surface D performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the various image setting processes 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the modification of the rotation unit. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the modification of the rotation unit. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the modification of the rotation unit. It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the continuous short reach production in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 3 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning continuous short reach production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous short reach effect setting process for detachment performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the mimetic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the reservation notice effect in the 1st modification of the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special reservation notice effect in the 2nd modification of a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special reservation notice effect in the 2nd modification of a 3rd control example. It is the mimetic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the reel production in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the modification of the rotation unit.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, wind turbines, rails 76 and 77, The ball opening 63, the second ball opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, the sorting device 700, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Mounted on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like. Moreover, although mentioned later for details, the distribution apparatus 700 is provided with the 1st entrance 64 into which a ball | bowl can enter, and the right 2nd entrance 640r. The balls that have entered the opening 710a are distributed to either the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r by the sorting device 700 (see FIG. 43).

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has won the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the right second entrance 640r. It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate when a winning is made in the mouth 640r.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A, C) or a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (big hit B) or a dismissed symbol by a lighting state, and indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of any of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot (jackpot A), 15R normal jackpot (jackpot B), and 2R probability variation jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” (jackpot A) is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” (jackpot C) is It is a probabilistic jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds. On the other hand, “15R normal big hit” (big hit B) shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds, and is in a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It is a big hit.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. 640 means a game state in which a ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by a winning (starting winning) of any of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol in synchronization with the variation display in FIG. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 600 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize at the second entrance 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in regions on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 capable of winning a ball is disposed. When a ball wins (wins) through the opening 710a with respect to the sorting apparatus 700, the ball that has entered is distributed to either the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. It is done. When the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. Therefore, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery drawing due to the second entrance switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the sorting device 700 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made on the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r are each one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. ing. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640r is the same, but the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 The number of winning balls paid out when the winning ball is won differs from the number of winning balls paid out when winning the ball at the second right entrance 640r, for example, the ball won at the first entrance 64 In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 and the right second entrance 640r may be 5.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. In addition, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so basically the ball enters the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the ball to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since it is easy to win, in addition to the balls that have entered the opening 710a being distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, to the second entrance 640 The jackpot lottery associated with entering the ball becomes easy to execute. Accordingly, the chances of winning a lottery are larger than usual, which is advantageous to the player as compared to normal.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning of any of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r becomes a big win, the predetermined time (variation) After the time has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution device 700 as viewed from the front. For example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided to a not-shown ball discharge path through the first out port 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the sorting device 700.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, an RTC 292, a firing sensor 293, a rotation unit 500 (including a drive motor 457 and an LED 532), A frame button 22 and the like are connected to each other.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the time counted by the RTC 292 configured with a known real-time clock, and when the time is within a specific time zone (00 minutes to 3/3 minutes), During the band, a rear image change command including information for changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a special stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. While this special stage is set, the stage is not changed even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). By changing to a special stage in a specific time zone, in a hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side, it can be changed to a special stage all at once in a specific time zone. A display effect with a sense of unity can be executed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. In FIG. 8, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are illustrated. The state in which the members 430 are respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed above and a light emitting decoration is disposed below. Each unit 800 is disposed.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, and the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted to the upper side of the rear case 300 and the overhang projecting to the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81). It can be displaced between positions (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotating unit 500 is caused to emit light, thereby causing a pattern with an afterimage of light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of this structure will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the sorting device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 that is substantially L-shaped in front view, a back base 420 that is superimposed on the back side of the front base 410, and the front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and is connected to one end side of the displacement member 430 so that the displacement member 430 is displaced in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). ), A front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide bar P1 that guides the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 that is disposed at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 and restricts the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the front surface of the front base 410 A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, a pair of all members excluding the decorative member 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposing members. In addition, the detailed description of the members disposed in a pair describes only the members disposed on the left side in the front view (left side in FIG. 9), and the members disposed on the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 9) The same reference numerals as those in the left side of the front view are attached, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body in front view, and includes a first piece 410X that forms a long side of a substantially L shape and a first side that forms a short side of a substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The extending direction of the first piece 410X is arranged in parallel with the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 that stands on the front side of the left and right outer end portion (left end portion), an upper groove 413 that is recessed in a circular arc shape in the upper portion, and a cross section in the lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The standing portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of a decoration member 450 described later and restricts the rearward displacement of the decoration member 450, and extends from the upper part to the lower part of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed so that the axes formed in a semicircular cross section are positioned on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 from the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413. The distance between the opposite ends to the lower end of the guide bar P1 is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 protruding to the back side, and a shaft support portion 416 protruding to a columnar shape on the back side. Formed mainly for the purpose.

  The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and the transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 from the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed through the opening 411, so that the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 is connected to the front base 410 and the rear base 420. As compared with the case where the drive motor 441 is disposed on the front base 410 while being inserted through the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 disposed between the two, the operation can be simplified and the number of man-hours for component replacement can be reduced. be able to. In this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be reliably fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability when the parts are replaced can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. The cross section is formed in a substantially L shape. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the back side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical bar member made of a metal material, and one end side is fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400 and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and the transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443 can be transmitted with a driving force.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear in which a shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the shaft hole fitted into the protrusion 417 of the front base 410, and transmits as described above. The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  The transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from the side surface on the back side. The protrusion 443a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, as described above, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a is displaced in an arc shape around the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The back surface base 420 is a plate member that is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front surface base 410, and includes a standing portion 421 that is erected on the front side on the outer edge portion.

  The standing portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the standing distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. The size is set to a large size, and the front end surface is disposed in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, it is possible to form a gap in which the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacement member 430 described later are disposed between the front base 410 and the back base 420.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge protrudes toward the back side. Further, the displacement member 430 includes a through-hole 433 that is circularly formed through the bent portion in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 that is formed through one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side. The other side is mainly provided with a driving side sliding hole 431 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a displacement side engaging portion 434 protruding from the protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through hole 433 is inserted through the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 443a. Further, the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and the transmission gear 443 is driven by the drive motor 441 as described above. , The projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive side sliding hole 431 in accordance with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced about the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is disposed in a decoration member 450 to be described later and into which a support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a. Is formed larger. Further, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430 in the longitudinal direction. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arcuate displacement locus centered on the through-hole 433.

  The displacement side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 described later, and is formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion protruding from the rear surface side of the displacement member 430. Moreover, the displacement side engaging part 434 is formed in the side surface inside the bending of the displacement member 430 bent in the substantially L shape in the front view. Thereby, the displacement side engaging part 434 can engage the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 on the inner side of the rear surface side of the displacement member 430.

  The torsion spring SP1 has a torsional portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates to the left around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). The displacement member 430 that forms the right side of the front view 400 has a biasing force applied to the displacement member 430 around the rotation axis. The one end side is the engagement portion 415 of the front base 410 and the other end side is the displacement member. 430 is respectively engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434. Accordingly, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through-hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the front view rotates clockwise). ) Is always energized in the direction.

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right, and a front base in which the size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. 410 is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with the lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting the central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base The back surface base 453 that covers the back surface of the front surface 452 and the rotation unit 500 that is rotatably disposed on the front surface side of the front surface base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed of a plate-like body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with upper and lower end surfaces bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a that protrudes from the back side, an engagement portion 452b that protrudes from the both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, a contact surface 452h that is formed smoothly on the front side of both ends in the left-right direction, And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-shaped body. Thus, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441 and the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452 a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engaging portion 452b is a protrusion with which the other end of an urging spring SP2 to be described later is engaged, and protrudes in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed as a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the back side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 described later can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the restriction unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is arranged to be connected to both left and right end portions of the front base 452. Moreover, the sliding part 451 is provided with the through-hole 451a opened to the up-down direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 disposed at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide bar P1. In other words, the decorative member 450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction when a driving force is applied from the driving motor 441.

  The back surface base 453 is a plate member that covers the back side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the central portion of the front base 452 in front view. Thereby, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the back base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453. A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front side of the first piece 410X. The front cover 460 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the first piece 410X in front view. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 includes a standing wall 461 that stands on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box-like body that opens on the back side.

  The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 that protrudes upward from the side surface that forms the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 that protrudes downward from the side surface that forms the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a is formed in a semicircular arc shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and a groove 463a that is recessed in a semicircular arc shape is formed on the back surface side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves into which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line with a semi-circular arc-shaped shaft, and the distance between the opposite ends from the upper end of the groove 462a to the lower end of the groove 463a is It is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide bar P1. Thereby, the both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. The guide bar P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 in a state in which it cannot be dropped off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to drop off.

  In addition, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 in the front-rear direction. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, and the end portion on the outer side in the left-right direction of the sliding portion 451 is disposed between the opposing dimensions. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall member 470 is a member disposed at both ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the center side in the left-right direction, and is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent to the back side in a side view. In addition, a wall surface that is bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the end surface on the front side of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface in the center in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 by unevenness, color, and the like. The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through the central opening of FIG. Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, front cover 460 etc.) arrange | positioned in the left-right direction outer side from the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to a player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side is rotatably attached. Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half of the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is disposed with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a later-described rotating unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be defined by the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510 coming into contact with each other.

  The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412 b of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position due to the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. The biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, it is possible to secure the length of the urging spring SP2 and to prevent the urging force from increasing excessively.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

  15A to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16A shows a position between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17 (a) corresponds to the state of being arranged at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to FIG. 17A. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the back base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of the members. The side (the long side on which the decoration side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is positioned inside the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotational direction on one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Match. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state of forming a). Therefore, the displacement member 430 can no longer rotate about the through hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  When the pair of drive motors 441 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B, and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are respectively pushed downward by sliding along the drive side sliding hole 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated about the axis of the through hole 433, and the decorative member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). From this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is disposed at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed). In this state, the decorative member 450 is located at the lowermost position and is projected from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through hole 433. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the radially outer end side. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 can be applied to the support portion 452a by the force that displaces in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the center. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 described later.

  Further, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state of forming a). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate about the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. The displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress ltpp that the decorative member 450 rattles.

  In addition, restriction units 490 are disposed in front of both ends of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the restriction unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. As shown in FIG. 20A is a side view of the restriction unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the restriction unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulation unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape whose back side is open, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and the case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on the opened outer edge (on the opening side).

  The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction, and a bulge from the inner side surface facing the opening to the back side. And a bulging portion 491c.

  The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the restriction unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The notch portions 491b are formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape by arranging two in the vertical direction on the side surfaces of the case member 491 on both sides in the left-right direction. The notch 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from the lower side of the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20 (c)) of the side surface (the back surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. Further, the bulging portion 491c includes a predetermined gap between the roller member 492 and the roller 492a.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in an annular shape when viewed from the axial straight section, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, a shaft portion 492b, and both sides of the roller 492a. And a pair of retaining rings E1 that are fitted onto a shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a. The shaft portion 492b is formed in a cylindrical shape that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and the axial dimension is between the lateral side surfaces of the case member 491. It is set larger than the width dimension. Moreover, the recessed part 492b1 recessed in an axial direction is formed in the axial direction both ends of the axial part 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially stepped cross section. The collar 492c includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having a larger outer diameter than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. In addition, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted into the inside.

  The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch 491b of the case member 491. As described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for restricting the displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491. The outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is the notch of the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both axial ends of the roller 492a is based on the distance dimension between the opposing left and right side surfaces on the inner side where the case member 491 opens. Is also formed small.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-type retaining ring), and is fitted around the recessed portion 492b1 with an opening being widened in the recessed portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after retaining ring E1 is fitted into recess 492b1 on one end side of shaft part 492b, small diameter cylindrical part 492c1 is placed on one side (the side on which retaining ring E1 is fitted externally) from one end to collar 492c. ), The shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted into the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion in a state where the first collar 492c is directed to the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 (side where the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). 492b is inserted. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted into the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c, which are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the opposing ends of the pair of retaining rings E1, are restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from being detached from the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a frame-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape in the front view is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening in the rear view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed to stand on the front side around the inner edge portion.

  The standing portion 493a is formed with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the recessed portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c disposed at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch 491b of the case member 491 so as to support the collar 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 in a state where the standing portion 493a side is the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thereby, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

  Next, the operation of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII portion of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a vertical view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400. FIG. 23A to 23C illustrate the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the restriction unit 490.

  In this case, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 along with the rotational displacement. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 to suppress rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging means is formed to be engageable with the engaging member, and the decorative member 450 or the front base. And the engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and using the displacement of the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is disposed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engaged state of the engaging means (displace the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position). Therefore, there is a problem in that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and a driving force necessary to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490, so that the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the displacement direction when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 are set substantially parallel to each other, the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. Since the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a. By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the roller 492a, and rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the vibration control effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 as the rotating unit 500 is displaced can be achieved. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the decorative member 450. Since it is inputted to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the amount of elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy when molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Further, since the impact sound generated when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, the player can be prevented from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress damage to the player's interest. In addition, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When they are displaced in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing each other's members. In other words, if the protrusion is brought into contact with the displacement member to prevent the displacement member from being stopped or rattling, the members are rubbed against each other when the displacement member is displaced in contact with the protrusion. Sound is generated.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Can be suppressed, and generation of a noise generated by rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 that is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. When it is not necessary, the decorative member 450 can be reduced in weight to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and when the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced in weight, rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the restriction unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. Arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is the case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to a substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical position of the member 491, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the restriction unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other. It is assumed that Thereby, it can suppress that the decoration member 450 rattles back and forth, right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and is in contact with the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24B, left-right direction). Therefore, it is suppressed that the decoration member 450 rattles in the front-back direction. Further, the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves to the left and right, so that the decorative member 450 is prevented from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other. Can be made.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452g is used when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position. The roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B and is positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the restriction unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

  Here, when the rotating member (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 suppresses rattling of the decorative member 450 that is displaced up and down, the rotating member (roller 492a) It is difficult to regulate the decorative member 450 along the displacement direction so that the decorative member 450 is not displaced with respect to shakiness in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the two, so that the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, only the vertical displacement that displaces the decorative member 450 to the first position can be allowed by the restriction unit 490, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the roller 492a disposed below the roller 492a disposed side by side in the vertical direction is in a state of contacting not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Thereby, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b is increased, and the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24C, left-right direction). It may be possible to form a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, however, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter. A structure that can be displaced in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and the roller 492a is formed between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by utilizing the elastic deformation. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is displaced by the displacement of the rotating unit 500. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to make the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 The bulging portion 491c can easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, and the relative backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed, so that the backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the displacement resistance can be increased as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. This can be suppressed.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided in the center of the decorative member 450, when the component is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to each component in addition to the weight of the decorative member 450. Acting, parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stopping operation can be assisted, so that the stopping operation in a direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the parts from being damaged and improve the reliability of the product.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged in the vertical direction along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from being tilted, and it is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 of the rotation unit 500. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged in parallel with each of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Accordingly, the front base of the decorative member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The backlash with respect to 410 can be suppressed effectively.

  More specifically, since the displacement form of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession movement of the rotation unit 500 (movement that the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h (that is, the roller 492a of the front base 452 is Can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450. However, the contact of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a can effectively suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotation unit 500. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 disposed on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the back base 453 facing each other, and a drive motor attached to the back side of the back base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back side of the front base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c that is recessed in the back side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. The

  The back surface base 453 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view smaller than the front view shape of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape on the right side in front view. The insertion hole 453a that opens and the shaft support portions 453c and 453d that protrude in a columnar shape on the front side are mainly provided.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of a drive motor 457, which will be described later, is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. Opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and are set in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back surface base 453 as described above, and the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the back surface base 453, and from the front side of the back surface base 453, screws, bolts, etc. It is fastened and fixed with.

  The gear 454 meshes with the gear 455 and is fixedly disposed on the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. Further, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 is engaged with a back surface base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500 to be described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through a shaft support portion 453c protruding forward of the back surface base 453, and rotates about the shaft support portion 453c. It is possible to arrange. Further, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are disposed. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452d of the front base 452, and meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is engaged with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member in which a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) is protruded on the side surface (end surface in the axial direction), and the shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft support portion 453d of the back surface base 453 so that the back surface. It is disposed on the base 453. Further, a part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452 e and meshed with the back surface base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotating unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the back base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thereby, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotation unit 500, and is configured so that the shaft portion 458a protruding from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened inside the shaft portion 458a, and electric wiring is inserted through the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the back side of the front base 452 through the opening 453b of the back base 453, the electric wiring in which the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a. At the same time, the front base 452 protrudes from the front.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line | wire of 29 (a). The rotation unit 500 will be described in a state at an initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 that forms an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 that forms a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

  The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear surface base 571 disposed on the rear surface side and a front surface base 572 disposed on the front surface side. And a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The back surface base 571 is formed in an annular shape in front view, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges out in an annular shape in back view is formed on the back side from the inner peripheral edge thereof. A gear 571a1 is formed on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 meshes with the gear 455 as described above. As a result, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force of the rotation is transmitted to the back base 571 (gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with an outer standing portion 572a that is erected from the outer peripheral edge portion, and an inner standing portion 572b that is erected in a U-shape when viewed from the inner circumferential circle portion. And comprising.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the back surface base 571 and the back surface of the front surface base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposed surfaces. The height is set substantially the same as the axial width dimension of BR, and the inner shape is set substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface on the standing tip side of the outer standing portion 572a is brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface base 571, and the screw inserted from the back surface side of the back surface base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that prevents the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. The inner shape of the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a.

  Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572 b can be externally fitted to the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotary unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having a different inner diameter and outer diameter. Are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. As a result, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back surface base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from being detached from the rotation transmission unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotary unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. Accordingly, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge portion thereof is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR and the inner edge portion 572b of the front base is inserted into the inner edge portion. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, the fastening member 573 can be prevented from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR.

  More specifically, it is possible to restrict the fastening member 573 from moving rearward with respect to the bearing BR by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 toward the front side is such that the bearing BR is disposed between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are moved. The side surface of this is abutted and regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from coming off from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 that externally fits the bearing BR is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotational motion when the rotary unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the annular metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the annular metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the fastening member 573 from rotating. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450.

  The top surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves to the back side (upper side in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and the front edge portion curves downward (to the back side in FIG. 29A). It is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front in the left-right direction (FIG. 29B, left-right direction), and a blower hole 512 that penetrates in the up-down direction (plate pressure direction). The pressing portion 513 protruding in a columnar shape is mainly provided on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 is formed on the back side. The semicircular radius is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

  The ventilation hole 512 is a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction (FIG. 29C, vertical direction), and is formed in a long hole shape that is opened long in the front-rear direction (FIG. 29A, vertical direction). A plurality of air holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing unit 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The protrusion height is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from the rear edge of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is disposed symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. In addition, since the decoration part 521 and the ventilation hole 522 which are formed in the lower surface base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the ventilation hole 512 which are formed in the upper surface base 510, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that the front base when viewed from the front. The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player by visually observing the mechanism when the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The irradiation unit 530 is mainly provided with a substrate member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531.

  The substrate member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape when viewed from above, which is slightly smaller than the shape of the upper surface base 510 when viewed from above. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the substrate member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

  In addition, the substrate member 531 has a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the substrate member 531 and will be described in detail later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458 b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the substrate member 531. Thereby, light can be irradiated from LED532 mentioned later via IC and a capacitor incorporated in the substrate member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mount type LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) in front view, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon sealed in the cavity) that emits light. Etc.) is formed in a circular shape in front view. A plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the substrate member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, LED532 can irradiate light to the reflecting plate 560 mentioned later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the upper surface base 510. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 is formed of a plate-like body having a silver decoration (plating) on the outer surface and having an outer shape in a top view substantially the same as a top view shape of the upper surface base 510. In addition, the reflection plate 560 includes a recessed portion 564 in which a front side surface is notched rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front cover 550 is inserted into the cutout portion so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is positioned substantially the same as the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recessed portion 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Thereby, it can suppress that the front cover 550 protrudes from the rotation unit 500, and is arrange | positioned. As a result, the rotary unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with few irregularities, and when the rotary unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the outer shape of each part, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30A.

  As shown in FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion erected upward from the outer edge portion (a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and the second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetratingly formed in the vertical direction, an irradiation restricting portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protrusion protruding from the front edge It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 that is recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation restricting portion 544.

  The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion on the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape in the top view on the front side (the lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is substantially the same as the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side in the top view of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Set the same. Further, the standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the substrate member 531. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that it cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 in the top view on the back side (upper side in FIG. 30A) is substantially the same as the shape on the back side in the top view of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. The standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back surface.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED532 irradiates other range. Further, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their mutual axes are arranged coaxially. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflection portion 563 of the reflection plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  Further, the irradiation hole 543 has an inner diameter that increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 is provided to protrude around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Thereby, since the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 facing each other can be reduced, the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Further, the projection dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projection leading end surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are set. The LED 532 is brought into contact with the LED 532. Thereby, since it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED enters into the irradiation hole 543, the outer diameter of the afterimage display by an afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation restricting portion 544 that contacts the LED 532 can be secured, so that the light of each LED 532 is emitted. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation restriction part 544 is connected to the adjacent irradiation restriction part 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other's outer peripheral surfaces. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected is formed with an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly protruding arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is ensured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. However, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by utilizing the contour of the outer shape.

  The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving back and forth and from side to side, and is formed at a position where the projection unit 530 is inserted into the through hole 531 a of the substrate member 531 when the rotating unit 500 is assembled. The projecting portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are vertically combined, and a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end side having a smaller diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from.

  The large-diameter portion 545 a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and penetrates the substrate member 531. The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protruding dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

  Accordingly, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the back side intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. In addition, since the protruding distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is changed to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. It can arrange | position in parallel with respect to.

  The small-diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531. Set to the same or slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the through-hole 531a of the substrate member 531 is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, whereby the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased by the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544, while minimizing the region recessed in the intermediate member 540, while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540, By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded to a portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recessed depth of the groove portion 546 is more than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set small.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.31 (b), the spreading | diffusion part 551 is typically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the side surface on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31 (b)) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31 (b)). Formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a roughened portion, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the rough surface. The rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflector 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflecting plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflecting plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.32 (b), the reflection part 563 is typically illustrated.

  32A and 32B, the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 standing on the upper surface side (the front side of FIG. 32A) and the partition wall 561. The reflective portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and the standing wall 562 standing along the edge on the back surface side are mainly provided.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U shape with the front side (the lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open in a top view, and a plurality of partition walls 561 are provided in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined into a wall portion extending in the front direction to serve as one wall portion. Thereby, the space which arranges the partition wall 561 in parallel can be made small. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 can be maximized.

  The reflection portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflection plate 560 and the partition wall 561 in a top view by laser processing or the like. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the reflecting portion 563 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a and separated from the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge portion among the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and roughening is not performed. Thereby, the reflection part 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form a holding portion for roughening the surface of the reflector 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined by 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Thereby, the light irradiated toward the back side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, the light irradiated to the front side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal part 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the edge on the back side of the reflector 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as that of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, the rotation unit 500 stores heat, and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotation unit 500 It is possible to suppress damage.

  As described above, the configured rotating unit 500 is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is disposed on the rear side thereof, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  The lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflecting plate 560 at the front portion of the rotating unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflecting plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched between the front surface side and the front surface cover 550. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state in which the through hole 531a is externally fitted to the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, the upper surface base 510 is disposed from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, whereby the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is disposed behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, with reference to FIG.33 and FIG.34, the light irradiated from LED532 of the irradiation unit 530 is demonstrated. 33A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33A. 34A and 34B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV part of FIG. 33B.

  FIG. 33A shows a state where the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. Further, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, a reflection portion 563 that is partitioned as one region by being surrounded by the partition wall 561 is disposed. . As described above, since each LED 532 is disposed above each irradiation hole 543, the light irradiated from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the separation of the light of each LED 532 can be clarified. As a result, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflection portion 563, the external appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, the structure in which the light of the LED 532 is incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (a)). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, even when the surface of the board member 531 is set so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the LED 532 and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Moreover, the light irradiated from LED532 can be efficiently radiate | emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560. FIG. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotary unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect.

  Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces facing the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is reflected again by the surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560), and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white having a light absorption rate lower than that of black, so that the light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on the outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state where the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface and is uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from opening of the reflection part 563 is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (b)). Reflected to the side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  In addition, since the rough surface of the horizontal part 563a is not formed at the front side end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500. In addition, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the rough surface processing is performed on the front surface side end portion of the rotating unit 500 among the inner surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface, and the front surface side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 is reflected. ), The front-side end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than the rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is diffusely reflected. Can be suppressed, and the light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (recessed portion 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed with the roughened surface, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the portion of the horizontal portion 563a that is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded diameter). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Further, the front side of the reflecting plate 560 (the rotating unit 500) is formed so as to bend toward the rear side toward the end with the central portion (rotating axis) in the left-right direction as the center. The front end (recessed portion 564) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 is formed at the end portion on the side where the notched portion 564 is formed, as the end portion is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the visually recognized brightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotation unit 500, the displacement speed (circumferential speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) toward the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotation axis The light from the LED 532 closer to is more bright (brighter) than the light from the LED 532 farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side (recessed notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the end portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 is separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500 in the radial direction. Since the length dimension of the end portion on the side where the portion 564 is formed is increased, the reflection portion 563 (LED 532) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 increases the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (I.e., by reducing the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), it can be viewed as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  Further, the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflecting plate 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 is increased as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction increases. Each visually recognized brightness (light brightness) can be made uniform.

  The light irradiating the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Also, here, if the light of the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without allowing the light-transmissive material member to pass through), the light of the LED 532 has high directivity to the front, so the player is dazzling. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the surface which diffuses the light irradiated from LED532 is formed in two places, the reflecting plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light irradiated from LED532 can be weakened. Thereby, it can suppress that a player visually recognizes the irradiated light and feels dazzling.

  Here, what has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and performs display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position is known. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the substrate (substrate member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Therefore, the outer shape in front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (the rotary unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating unit 500 is configured such that the board member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is in a posture in which the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500. Since it is disposed between 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, it is possible to improve the visibility on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are front views of the rotation unit 500. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the code of the airflow K is given. Further, the air holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description when the rotation unit 500 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view is used. Since there is, explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457 described above, external air enters through the air holes 512 and 522 by the rotation. An air flow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotary unit 500, when the rotary unit 500 rotates, the air holes 512 and 522 pass through the air holes 512 and 522. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotary unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated in the left direction when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the blow hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side of the front view and the blow hole of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side of the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction in which air is taken into (inserted through) the air holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the rotating unit 500. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  In addition, since the ventilation hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the ventilation hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed to be pointed with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction when viewed from the front, External air can be easily taken into the rotary unit 500 by the blower holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the blower holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of front view. That is, even when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction, the same effects as those described above (when the rotation unit 500 rotates to the left in front view) are obtained.

  Here, a substrate (substrate member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If the heat generated when the IC / capacitor is operated cannot be sufficiently cooled, the soldering of the LED soldered to the substrate and the IC / capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, leading to contact failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the outside air is taken into the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotary unit 500 from the blow holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35A, the back side of the paper surface) is moved to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the back side opening (gap between the opposing surfaces) of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35 (a) on the front side of the paper surface) is radial from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of rotation of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, and is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500 to be released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, so that the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 is efficiently taken from the back side. Can be exhausted automatically, so that the heat generation can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. Further, by exhausting from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is elongated along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is utilized to move the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward during rotation). It can be made to flow and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 on the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but air circulation using the centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570). The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken outside air is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the air inside the rotation unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotation unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotation unit 500 is reduced. External air is taken in through a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of 500 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  In this case, the front wall that forms the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29A, the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). The curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation planes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped shape). The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (radially outward at the time of rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the back side becomes substantially a right angle, so that vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. . Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29 (a) the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). The shape of the curved portion is curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by the centrifugal force is gradually increased. The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. The flow of air can be made smooth by suppressing the formation of vortices. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, the distance dimension between the opposite sides of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 on the back surface side (FIG. 35 (a) vertical dimension) is the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying rotation. By exhausting from the rear side on the radially outer side, the intake can be efficiently performed when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation shaft. As the lower surface base 520 rotates, the outside air on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be prevented from being disturbed (flow in the rotational direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed so as to be narrowed from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 has the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520. It is possible to suppress the generation of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be efficiently performed. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610, The sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 is mainly provided.

  The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding from the lower part of the inner peripheral edge in the front view to the center cover 620 side (rear side), a wall 612 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral side surface, and the rear side. A fastening hole 613 that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side and an opening 614 that opens on the front side of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 that is disposed on the back side. The

  The frame 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is visible to the player through the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed by bending from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the back side. The top surface has a first recessed portion 611a at the front end and a second recess at the back end. The installation portions 611b are recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on the upper surface thereof, and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b, and distributes the ball. A state in which a ball can easily win a prize can be formed in the opening 710a of the device 700. Accordingly, a plurality of flow paths of the spheres flowing down the game area can be formed, so that the player can be provided with interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a recessed depth toward the front side. Is deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a sphere to an opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 contacts the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60, so The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes provided on the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later to the front side, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 irradiated with the sensor light of the sensor 630.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light transmissive material, is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621 Side wall part 622 erected on the front side from the front side, and a mounting part 623 projecting outward from the erected tip surface of the side wall part 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. The

  The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the back side (from the front side becomes a convex curved surface) as it goes outward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as “first portion 621a”) of the central portion in the left-right direction is formed in front of the left and right ends and the peripheral edge of the lower end (hereinafter referred to as “second portion”).

  Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space which the decoration member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 mentioned above displaces and produces can be ensured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610, and the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above. Where the distance between the front face of 620 increases and the side wall 622 increases, the distance between the back face of the frame 610 and the front face of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated).

  That is, the standing dimension on the front side of the side wall 622 is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is disposed on the frame body 610. Thus, when the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to prevent the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being projected too far to the front side of the frame body 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protruding portion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a player's motion, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives reflected light that is reflected from the light emitted from the light emitting unit. And an irradiation surface 631 having the following.

  The sensor 630 is disposed at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is disposed on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed in a state where the irradiation surface 631 is inclined toward the center front side of the center frame 600. Thereby, the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the front side central portion of the game board 13 to the player side through the glass 8.

  Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLa-XLa of FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLb-XLb of FIG. FIG.

  In FIGS. 39A and 40B, the light irradiation area of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and is illustrated as irradiation areas R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are disposed in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be formed is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the second portion 621 b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via the cover member 621 (transmitted), and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. This can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 disposed on the front side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 is emitted directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to the irradiation region R1 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front surface of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the region of the irradiation region R2 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, a motion sensor is exposed in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is disposed in the gaming machine and detects the player's operation on the front side of the liquid crystal device (the third symbol display device 81). There was a problem of detracting from interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the back side (outside) of the decorative member, the sensor 630 can be more difficult to see, but the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit (irradiation surface 631) are in front. The detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side (opening of the frame body 610) of the decorative member, the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easy to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part of the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is irradiated to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( Reflected by the player side). Accordingly, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, and a range in which an object can be detected can be ensured while being difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

  Further, since the front surface side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is close to the sensor 630. Can be made more acute, while at a position far from the sensor 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected to the cover member 621 side when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, so that the light reflected in the different directions progresses. The direction can be a traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light receiving detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is positioned on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610, and the second portion 621b is positioned on the back side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610 (FIG. 39 ( b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is the back surface of the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned in the position which becomes the back side rather than.

  Thereby, the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper part of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Further, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( It can suppress more reliably that the rotation unit 500) interferes with the 1st part 621a, and the size of a displacement member can be aimed at by that much.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. Easy to do. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while disposing the sensor 630 on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) Can be suppressed from being irradiated.

  That is, if the upper part of the cover member 621 is curved to the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from obliquely above becomes a shape that easily reflects to the front side. Since the normal line direction is formed as a curved surface that is directed at least below the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front surface of the cover member 621, the light can be prevented from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41A and 41B are sectional views of the rotation unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) (position where the extending direction is horizontally oriented) of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 41B shows the rotating unit 500 centered on the rotation axis. The state rotated 90 degrees is illustrated.

  41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600 are displayed. When positioned at the position, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thereby, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a rotating object in front of the third symbol display device 81, a wind flow is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the top of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotation unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 that is recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame body 610), the flow area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotary unit 500 can be partitioned. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) can block the wind, so that the blown-off dust or dust is detected by the sensor. It is possible to suppress a rise in the light emission / light reception route and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 wraps around from the standing front end on the back side standing from the stage 611 to the front side, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. And the ball that rolls on the stage 611 is affected. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage 611 from being affected by wind, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. Can be blocked by. As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make the ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 easily visible to the player, and to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball due to the action of the wind.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down region where the sphere flows down are partitioned by the partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface disposed on the back side of the game board 13 Since the case 300 is provided with many members that generate heat, such as a drive motor 441 that drives the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, the heat is placed inside the displacement area (the back side of the game board 13). ) There is a problem that the board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame body 610 but is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side of the game board 13 (rather than the rear side) can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, the warm air is passed through the predetermined distance from the front side of the game board 13 It can be easily washed. That is, since the heated air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, the predetermined distance between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is moved to the front side. Easy to flow. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind flows out from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame body 610 and flows down the front of the game board 13. May affect the sphere.

  In contrast, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board 13). It is possible to prevent the flow of water from being affected. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the ball launch unit 112a and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively high. For example, the stage of the center frame 600 Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the sorting apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 700. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45A is a cross-sectional view of the allocating device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the allocating device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45A. 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 along the XLVc-XLVc line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 along the XLVd-XLVd line in FIG. It is.

  In FIG. 43, the outer peripheral surface of the sorting member 760, the seesaw member 762, the first ball inlet 64, the right second ball inlet 640r, and the outer shape of the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. Also, in FIG. 45 (d), the path of the sphere paid out from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting apparatus 700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. The front side formation part 710 and the back side formation part 720 arrange | positioned with respect to the base board 60 on the back side (FIG. 43 paper surface back side) are mainly provided and formed.

  The front side forming part 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The back side forming part 720 is mainly formed with an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the above-described opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric combination 640a positioned below the opening 710a, and the electric combination 640a A through hole 731 located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through-hole 731 and formed in the front-rear direction are mainly formed. .

  The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper protrusion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the back surface to the front surface.

  The projecting wall 731a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the through-hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, a sphere that passes (rolls) through the inside of the through-hole 731 by an interposition member 750 and a distribution member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is also front-facing from the back side. Rolled to the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the back surface side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D shape in front view with the lower surface side curved, and protrudes upward from the lower surface at a first projecting portion 732a projecting downward from the upper surface at the center position in the left-right direction in front view. Second projecting portion 732b.

  The first projecting portion 732a has a projecting distance that increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45 (a)) to the back side (the left side in FIG. 45 (a)). The second projecting portion 732b is formed such that the projecting distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the sphere can be rolled to the back side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the back side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the first protrusion 732a can suppress upward displacement.

  On the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732, a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed. The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on a side surface of the sensor SE. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is located coaxially with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thereby, since it can be set as the state which inclines a little downward as the opening direction of a through-hole goes to a back side, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which passes the inside of the through-hole of sensor SE stays inside a through-hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in front view. Are arranged symmetrically, and the outer shape is formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap of a size through which a sphere can pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) that forms the game area in a front view. Thereby, it is suppressed that the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is sandwiched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and stays in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protrusions 743 facing each other.

  The upper projecting portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and disposed inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  Further, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls to the bending member 740 side, A connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the ball moves. Therefore, since the rolling of the sphere can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the sphere from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the sphere, resistance increases when the sphere rolls on the connecting portion, and the sphere jumps in steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the sphere and suppress clogging of the sphere.

  In this case, even if the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the back and the sphere passes through the inside of the ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the sphere rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the part shape of the bending member 740 is complicated because the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protrusion 741 has a substantially U shape when viewed from the back, the shape of the component can be simplified and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in rear view with the upper side opened. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed so as to face each other in the vertical direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second pitching path KR2”) for feeding a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding front end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the ball passing path (hereinafter referred to as the ball) is sent in the vertical direction between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (Referred to as “first pitching route KR1”).

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743. The guide part 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape whose rear side is opened in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that sends a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first pitching route KR1) in the vertical direction and then sends it to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The vertical height of the lower inner edge is formed to be slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the back surface.

  The guide part 742 is formed with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thereby, since it contacts and guides (turns back to the back side) with two guide parts 742, it can control that a ball shifts in the horizontal direction.

  Note that the protruding front end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they come closer to the opposing surfaces (see FIG. 45B). Thereby, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement of the sphere, which is in contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (turned back to the back side), in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes to the inside of the left and right side surfaces in the rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval. As a result, when the ball to be sent inside the upper protrusion 741 in the normal state rolls in the left-right direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the sent ball. On the other hand, when two spheres flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the sphere flowing behind collides with the sphere flowing forward, the previous sphere enters between the side walls 741a, so that It is possible to secure a distance to escape in the direction and to prevent the sphere from clogging inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball that is sent inside the upper protrusion 741.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in the rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on the back side in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Set to the height of. Thereby, when a sphere is continuously sent into the bending member 740, it is possible to prevent the previous sphere from escaping to the opening 744 and clogging of the sphere into the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-like body that is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front and whose front side is open. In addition, the sorting member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both end portions of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward the left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of each inclined surface 761, and above the seesaw member 762. It is mainly provided with a ball outlet 763.

  The ball outlet 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the opening 710a of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the interposition member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposition member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a space through which the sphere can pass), and the opening 710a of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It is connected with the internal space (see FIG. 44). As a result, it is possible to send a ball to be awarded to the opening 710a to the inside of the space A and to send the inside of the space A.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward from the outer edge portion at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted into the annular shape inside Part 762b.

  The shaft portion 762 b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, and is formed in a columnar shape and is inserted inside the annular shape of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

  The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the spheres to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the sphere is sent from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball sent from the space A by the central protrusion 762a can be sent in the left-right direction. The protrusions 762a provided at both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and displace the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the ball passes (the seesaw member 762 is rotated). And the rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted when the tip end surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761 come into contact with each other. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided sphere collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third pitching path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 roll and are sent. It is formed so as to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction. As a result, the balls distributed right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 roll on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  The end of the inclined surface 761 on the descending side is formed so as to incline in the direction approaching the interposed member 750 so that the thickness of the back side increases toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the end thereof is used as the first entrance 64 or the right side second entrance of the interposition member 750 disposed in front of the distribution member 760. The ball can be sent to 640r. More specifically, the balls distributed to the left side of the front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 are sent (entered) to the first entrance 64. On the other hand, the balls distributed to the right side in front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 are sent (entered) to the second right entrance 640r.

  The interposed member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower part in the left-right direction in the front view, and the first ball entrance 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side. The right side second entrance 640r penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side, and the first entrance 64 and the recovery hole 752 opened below the right side 2 entrance 640r are mainly provided. Formed.

  The first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are formed on the front side of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right end portions of the distributing member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above through the first entrance 64 and the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the right second entrance A path for passing the ball 640r and feeding it to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, both referred to as “fourth pitching path KR4”) can be formed.

  As described above, the collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates a sphere installed in the store, and the sphere collected in the collection hole 752 is circulated by the circulation device and is again launched from the ball launch unit 112a as a game ball. .

  The sorting apparatus 700 configured as described above is sent as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third pitching path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When a ball that is sent through the third pitching route KR3 in the left direction is sent to the end of the third pitching route KR3, the ball inside the first entrance 64 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the front side The ball is sent to the fourth pitch route KR4. On the other hand, when a ball that is sent through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is sent to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the second right entrance 640r on the right side of the interposed member 750 disposed on the front side. To the fourth pitching route KR4. A ball that is sent through the fourth pitching route KR4 is sent to the first pitching route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. A ball that is sent through the first pitching route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2. A ball sent through the second pitching route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 and passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through-hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides. The electric accessory 640 a is positioned between the lower protrusions 743 of the member 740.

  In this case, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball-sending path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to cause a clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), the flow speed of the sphere can be increased, and it is difficult to generate a ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 (the sorting member 760) is increased, and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to arrange.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is difficult for the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 to occur, and accordingly, the third pitching path KR3. It is possible to reduce the angle of the downward inclination of (a gentle downward inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the third pitching path KR3 (the distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a is impossible in the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743. It is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (a center frame 600 is disposed), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, the opening of the center of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has increased with the demand for an increase in the size of the 3rd symbol display device 81. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third pitching path KR3 and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged in a space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  In other words, as described above, when the angle of the downward slope of the third ball-sending path KR3 is reduced (the downward slope is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is reduced, and it is easy to cause clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and make it difficult to cause clogging in the lower protrusion 743. The space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 is increased, and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to arrange. Further, since the position of the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It is difficult to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with balls. The angle of the downward slope of the three-sending path KR3 can be reduced (the downward slope is gentle). As a result, the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) can be raised (increased) in the height direction (vertical direction), so the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which the sphere can pass can be ensured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a, an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is a conventional product. Then, this is impossible, and as described above, this is possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the pitching of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a state where there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected), the previous (preceding) A part of the sphere enters the opening 744 and is sent to the back side, and is guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, when a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, the two spheres are substantially free of gaps in the passage (two spheres are connected in series). ) When a ball is sent, the following ball touches the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that they cannot roll and the ball is clogged. It was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connection portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2, when passing through the lower protrusion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 have a tolerance, it is possible to make it difficult to block the sphere at a bent portion where the sphere is likely to be blocked. In other words, in the region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed down (dropped) along the first pitching route KR1 changes direction and rolls in the extending direction of the second pitching route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and it is easy for the sphere following the preceding sphere to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the leading ball, it leads. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) and to be pressed against the side wall, and to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that the first ball path KR1 falls (flows down). When the ball to be reached reaches the bottom wall of the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, the preceding sphere can escape between the openings 744 and be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in a side view, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the size of the opening 744 is set so that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening 744. A form in which the sphere to be pushed presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744 in some cases. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening 744, and a sphere clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, since the opening 744 is opened larger than the outer shape of the sphere (the sphere is formed in a size that allows the passage of the sphere), a form in which the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed. Even in the case, the preceding sphere can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding sphere is fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744. You can avoid that. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down. A sphere to be made can flow into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the sphere that has flowed into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member from the opening 744 The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (a region where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, and therefore flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 are in tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion inclined downward while being curved toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed. As a result, when the sphere that flows down (falls) along the first pitching path KR1 changes its direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2, the sphere is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. Can be used to quickly roll. This facilitates the rolling of the preceding ball before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball follows the back side (the ball is moved along the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2). Since it can suppress that it presses against the side wall of the back surface at the time of rolling, both rolling can be made easy to continue. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), a ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2. When doing so, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Furthermore, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion of the first pitch route KR1 and the second pitch route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleanability when cleaning the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base body 810 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a front side of the base body 810. The light emitting device 820 is mainly provided, and a cover member 830 that covers the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

Second Embodiment
Next, the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment. FIG. 49A is a side view of the restriction unit 2490, FIG. 49B is a rear view of the restriction unit 2490, and FIG. 49C is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49B. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 2490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. The

  The restriction unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on an outer edge portion on the opening side of the case member 2491, and the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. The rotating member 2494 that is pinched and rotatably supported by a shaft, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 are mainly provided.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and has a width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 49B, left-right direction) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side and a notch portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (FIG. 49 (b) vertical direction) on both side surfaces of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). The The notch portion 2491b is a notch for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion so as to stand on the front side.

  The standing portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 described later can be disposed in a rotatable state on the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the recessed portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed from a plate-like body having an oval shape when viewed from the side, and the longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494b that protrudes in a columnar shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a that is formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft And a restricting portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in the box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Thus, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491 by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and disposing the recessed portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back side. In addition, the rotating member 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the restricting portion 2494c.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape and has an inner diameter dimension larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 into the shaft portion 492b. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The restriction unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft portion 492 b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494 a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged side by side between the pair of rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after being fitted into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, an outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back side, thereby rotating. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and rotating the rotating member 2494. In addition, the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b biases the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed side by side to the front side (left side in FIG. 49C). It can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50A to 50C are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50A corresponds to FIG. 24A, FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24B, and FIG. 21C corresponds to FIG. 18C.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side of the roller member 492 disposed on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

  Accordingly, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50B is substantially the same as the substantially vertical middle position of the case member 2491. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to a position in the vertical direction, the pressure at which the roller 492a abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is higher than that of the restriction unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be small. In this case, the rotation member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side does not displace to the front side (the rotation member 2494 The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

  Accordingly, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B and is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the driving motor 441.

  When the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50C is displaced to the first position, the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thereby, the pressing force with respect to the decoration member 450 of the roller 492a arrange | positioned above can be raised. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller member 492 disposed above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced so that the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced. That is, with the displacement of the decorative member 450, the pressing force applied to the decorative member 450 from the restriction unit 2490 can be changed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting apparatus 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 3700. FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the distribution device 3700 in the third embodiment, the opening of the second entrance 640 is connected to the distribution device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is mainly formed with a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The back surface forming portion 3720 includes an interposed member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750, and an interposed member positioned below the distribution member 760. And a second pitching path 3770 disposed on the back side of 3750.

  The prize-winning member 3730 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the opening 710a described above at the center upper part in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a below the opening 710a, and the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a. A through-hole 731 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, a second through-hole 3733 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a bottom that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction below the second through-hole 3733 The side insertion hole 732 is mainly provided.

  The second through-hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second entrance 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward as seen from the back side to the front side. The

  The second projecting wall 3733a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 in a front view, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the second through hole 3733 by the interposition member 3750 and the second pitching path, which will be described later, the sphere can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 described above, and both the left and right sides of the above-described second entrance 640. The pair of outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  The bending member 3740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below from 3745.

  The intermediate projecting portion 3745 is a wall portion that is long in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53 (b)) in the rear view, and is formed at positions on the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protrusion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  Further, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the upper projecting portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other.

  The second opening 3746 opens in a substantially U shape with the back side opened in a side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size through which a sphere can pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second pitching path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed in a substantially box shape having a constant thickness with the front side opened. The second pitching path 3770 is a pitching path for feeding a ball that enters the second pitching slot 640 to the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750. In addition, a ball feeding path for sending a ball between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposed member 3750 can be formed.

  The second pitching path 3770 is disposed such that the left end is located on the back side of the second entrance 640 of the winning member 3730 in the front view, and the right end is the second penetration of the winning member 3730. The hole 3733 is disposed on the back side. That is, the second pitching path 3770 is disposed on the interposed member 3750 in such a manner that the left end portion in front view is located above the right end portion and tilts downward toward the right end portion.

  Further, the second pitching path 3770 has a left end portion in front view connected to the second entrance 640 and a right end portion connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 rolls into the second throwing path 3770 and then rolls in the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower portion in the left-right direction, and a first input that is formed in the left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 64 and a right second inlet 640r, a recovery hole 752 positioned below the first inlet 64 and the right second inlet 640r and formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction; The second connection hole 3753 is formed between the entrance 640r and the recovery hole 752 and is formed to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball that rolls on the inner side of the second pitching path 3770 described above passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposed member 750.

  The sorting apparatus 3700 configured as described above is sent as follows. The balls entering from the opening 710a are sent to the sorting member 760 and are alternately sent to either one of the inclined surfaces 761 in the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is sent to the end of the inclined surface 761, the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r of the interposed member 3750 disposed on the front side is provided. The ball passes through the inside and is sent to the back side of the bending member 740. The balls sent to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 are guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740 and fall downward, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 is inserted. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  A ball entering from the second entrance 640 is sent to the second pitching path 3770 and is sent from the left end to the right end inside the second pitching path 3770. The ball sent to the right end portion of the second pitching path 3770 is passed through the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passed through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, after being guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falling downward, after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second entrance 640 can be detected by the sensor SE disposed on the right side of the winning member 3730 as viewed from the front. There is no need to provide a new sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE that detects the sphere entering from the opening 710a can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the sphere entering the second entrance 640, so that the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. .

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54A and 54B are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the opening 710a and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second entrance 640 and is sent to the back of the bending member 3740. If the balls sent to the side are sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and clog the balls.

  That is, a ball sent from the second entrance 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as “lower sphere”) is sent from the opening 710a. Then, the ball is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740 and collides with a ball that falls from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as “upper ball”), There is a possibility that the ball may become clogged due to being caught by being caught on the front side end portion of the second through hole 3733.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower sphere can be discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or facing the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the balanced state between the sphere and the upper sphere and to prevent the sphere from clogging in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere and a balanced state is formed, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction where the upper sphere is located, and the upper sphere Since either the left or right is leaned depending on the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. Thereby, the balanced body of the lower sphere and the upper sphere can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of the ball in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55A is a front view of a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), a passing path through which a sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, a winning opening is formed on the outer side of the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the lateral direction (FIG. 55 (a) lateral direction). 4063 is disposed.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass and is disposed on the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposed member 4750 described later, and the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposed member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second pitching path KR2, and a path (sixth pitching path KR6) in which the sphere passes through and is sent downward is formed. The That is, the sixth pitching route KR6 and the second pitching route KR2 are connected.

  In the sixth pitching path KR6, third connection holes 4752a projecting on both the left and right sides are formed, and a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is sent to the inside of the third connection hole 4752a and is sent to the sixth pitching path.

  In addition, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE disposed in the sixth pitching path KR6 is disposed on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thereby, the sphere that has entered the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thereby, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be awarded to the winning opening 4063. In other words, the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes not only through the sensor SE but also from the opening 744 into the game area, and the flowed ball enters the winning opening 4063 and moves the sensor SE2. The form which passes can be formed and an interest can be given to a game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position where all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 to the gaming area can be received, or a part of the winning opening 4063 depending on the state of the ball that has flowed out from the opening 744 into the gaming area. These spheres may be received and some of the spheres may be arranged at positions where they cannot be received.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-sending passage KR1 and the second ball-sending passage KR2, the first ball-sending route KR1 can be obtained by paying out a ball that is likely to be clogged from the opening to the game area. And the ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connecting portion between the second pitching path KR2.

  Further, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the state in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063. Yes, it can be easily given to players.

  Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the upper side of the sensor SE arranged in the sixth pitching path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connecting hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged on the sixth pitching path KR6. Therefore, since the two sensors can be passed by the ball entering from the winning opening 4063, the player can be provided with interest.

  Further, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that a ball | bowl is blocked in the connection part of the 1st pitching path | route KR1 and the 2nd pitching path | route KR2.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is disposed in the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line 600 in the left-right direction. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center. Moreover, you may form as a curved surface convex on the back side. In addition, a curved surface may be partially formed. It is sufficient that at least light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 and an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is used for both the role of allowing the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side and the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630. The area may be divided into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56) and the center side of the second region R2 at the both ends (third symbol display device). 81) and the first region R1.

  1st area | region R1 is an area | region which makes the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 arrange | positioned at the back side of the cover member 621 visually recognizable from a player, and is formed from the amount of light-transmitting materials with comparatively high transparency. The second region R <b> 2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 10. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 only needs to be visible to the player located on the front side of the gaming machine 10, and therefore is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The same position is preferred. In this modification, the sensor 630 will be described in a state where it is disposed at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having a high reflectance such as silver may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

  Alternatively, the second region R2 may be curved so as to protrude toward the back surface, or the second region R2 may be flat. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and can be emitted to the front side, the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 is disposed behind the cover member 621. You may set up. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, so that when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened by transmitting the cover member 630 having a convex curved shape on the front side.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third pitching path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the two inclined surfaces 761 are not necessarily limited thereto. The lengths of the third pitches KR3 may be different from each other. In this case, it is possible to make the player entertained because the time until the respective balls distributed to the right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 are detected by the sensor SE can be made different on the left and right paths.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed in a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, and the roller 492a is displaced so as to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material with a high elastic modulus, and for example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the roller 492a disposed in the upper part comes into contact with the decorative member 450 prior to the roller 492a disposed in the lower part. The roller 492a to be in contact with the decorative member 450 may be abutted after the roller 492a disposed at the lower portion.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed on the upper portion of the restriction unit 490 at the initial position (position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated) is in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 50). (A) You may comprise so that a predetermined clearance may be provided in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. Therefore, the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 450 The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined interval is provided between the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to suppress air from staying (stagnation) in the irradiation hole 543. That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed in the uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface made only of projections (projections). The surface which consists only of a dent (dent) may be sufficient. Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keystroke, a polygonal diameter, or a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) that can reflect light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is converted into a displacement region of the rotary unit 500. You may make it introduce | transduce into (rotation area | region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 532 while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. Further, only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof with smoke (making it difficult to be visually recognized by the player). Therefore, the production effect by LED532 (light) can be heightened.

  In addition, with the conventional product, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each embodiment described above, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-described space with smoke (ie, to stay around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, a jackpot effect using the rotation unit 500 can be executed during variable display. More specifically, the rotation unit 500 is configured by a known versatile lighter, and the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in a row inside is changed according to the amount of rotation of the rotation unit 500, thereby rotating the rotation unit 500. A specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the locus.

  In this control example, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 when a specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the locus of the rotation operation is configured to be 100 ms / rotation (that is, 600 rpm (revolution per minute)). . Here, since the time resolution of human eyes (the minimum lighting time that can be visually recognized) is about 50 to 100 ms, a light source that repeatedly turns on and off at intervals of 100 ms is always recognized as being in a lighting state. Since the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 in this control example is 100 ms / rotation, the rotation unit 500 rotates once every 100 ms and returns to the same position. By controlling the LED 532 to be turned on again when returning to the same position, it is possible to make an illusion that the position illuminated by the LED 532 is always lit for the player. Thereby, it is possible to give an impression as if a specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the locus of the rotation operation.

  The rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is not limited to 100 ms / rotation, and may be slower or faster than this. When the rotation speed is high, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that a specific character or design is displayed more clearly. When the rotation speed is slow, it can be visually recognized (illusioned) as if a specific character or design is blinking. By providing a case where the rotation speed is fast and a case where the rotation speed is slow, it is possible to provide a case where a specific character or design is turned on or a case where it is blinked, and it is possible to increase display variations and improve the interest of the player. . In addition, it is naturally possible to provide a case where a specific character or symbol is blinked by changing the lighting interval of the LED 532 without changing the rotation speed.

  In addition, since the rotation unit 500 has a substrate member 531 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 532, when a big hit effect using the rotation unit 500 is performed, the IC 532 mounted on the LED 532 or the substrate operates. Generate heat. For this reason, if the rotary unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor to the substrate melts due to heat generation, which may lead to poor contact. For this reason, in this control example, it is set as the structure which suppresses the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, and it is comprised so that a novel jackpot effect can be implement | achieved, preventing a poor contact.

  In the first control example, the number of times of entering the first entrance 64 and the number of entrances of the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r can be suspended up to 4 times each. It is configured. Then, when the number of times of entering the first entrance 64 and the number of entrances of the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r are the upper limit of 4 times (total of 8 times). In the case where the ball has been put on hold), a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) for executing the same line of production can be executed over the variable display corresponding to the eight times of entering. . By this continuous notice effect, the player's sense of expectation can be continuously held over a plurality of continuous variation displays. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the special symbol lottery executed based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 is referred to as “special symbol 1 lottery”, and each second entrance (second entry) The special symbol lottery executed based on the entrance to the ball entrance 640 and the right second entrance entrance 640r) is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  First, the configuration of the rotation unit 500 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57A is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotation unit 500 is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the drive motor 457. In this example, the case where only the LED 532 (LED 1) arranged on the outermost side among the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the rotation unit 500 continues to be lit and the other LEDs 532 are turned off is shown. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the rotating unit 500 rotates 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the LED 1 kept on, the LED 1 emits light for a player observing from the front of the rotating unit 500. The locus of light (hatched area in FIG. 57) is recognized as an afterimage, and it is recognized as if an arc having the same color as the emission color of the LED 1 appeared in the air. In an actual effect, a specific character is displayed as an afterimage by switching the lighting timing and the lighting timing of the plurality of LEDs 532 according to the rotation position (number of rotation operation steps).

  FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 532 of the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the rotating unit 500, 40 sets of LEDs 1 to 40 are arranged in a row as the LEDs 532. Each LED is composed of LEDs of three colors, red, blue, and green, and a vertically long and substantially rectangular diffusion plate is disposed on the front side thereof. With this diffusion plate, the LED light irradiated from the back side can be transmitted evenly (evenly) to the front side. As described above in the description of the structure of the rotation unit 500, the LEDs 532 are not directly disposed on the back side of the diffusion plates. Each diffusing plate has a structure in which light reflected by the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irradiated (see FIGS. 34A and 34B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, description will be given of how the afterimage looks at the time of actual jackpot presentation using the rotation unit 500. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, in this control example, when a special symbol is selected and a big hit is made and the rotating unit 500 operates, afterimages are displayed by setting a predetermined light emission pattern for each LED 1-40. . In the present control example, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set so that the afterimage is a “hit” character. By displaying the winning character as an afterimage, the player can easily recognize that the current special symbol lottery was a big hit. In addition, although mentioned later for details, the light emission pattern of each LED1-40 which comprises the rotation unit 500 is prescribed | regulated in the operation scenario table 222f provided in ROM222 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. The light emission pattern defined in the operation scenario table 222f defines one turn of the rotation unit 500. In other words, the same light emission pattern is repeatedly set every time the rotation unit 500 makes a round. Thereby, the same character ("winning" character) can appear at the same position every round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the “win” character.

  Although not shown in the figure, the lower half of the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 displays an afterimage of a “hit” character displayed on the upper half and a “hit” character having rotational symmetry. Controlled. Thereby, it can be made to recognize more reliably that it is a big hit with respect to a player.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 59B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” and sub-designs without numbers. Each main symbol is configured by attaching a number from “1” to “9” on a rear symbol made of sea creatures (octopus, shark, crab, etc.) predetermined for each number. The sub-design is composed of a simple design having a substantially triangular shape.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, a variable display in which any of the main symbols to which “1 to 9” is added is performed. If “big hit B” is selected, a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which “2, 4, 6, 8”, which is an even number, is added. That is, there is a possibility that a variable display in which main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are aligned is performed only in the case of a probable big hit. For this reason, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to play a game in expectation that odd numbers are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 3/4 is the main display area Dm for displaying the 3rd symbol variably, and the others. The lower quarter is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol and the sub symbol are alternately arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the right to the left with periodicity to display the change. Done. In particular, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed on the left, middle, and right three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The left vertical line, middle vertical line, and right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L1 to L3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line rising to the right and a diagonal line falling to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L4 and L5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Despite the player firing the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), any one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r However, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games are played. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. Of these, it is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in this sub display area Ds, a substantially square-shaped execution display area Ds1a on which a symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls are displayed. And a holding display area Ds1b having a horizontally long rectangular shape.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three main symbols and three sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), or each second entrance (the second entrance) 2 entrances 640, right entrance 2nd entrance 640r), the number of entrances is held up to a maximum of 4 each, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and It is also displayed in the display area Ds. More specifically, in the holding display area Ds1b, the number of holding balls based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and each second entrance (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r). ) The number of reserved symbols equal to the total number of reserved balls based on the entry to) is displayed. That is, when one holding symbol is displayed in the holding display area Ds1b, it indicates that the total number of holding balls is one, and when four holding symbols are displayed, the total number of holding balls is displayed. Indicates four balls. Further, when no holding symbol is displayed in the holding display area Ds1b, the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball. In FIG. 59 (b), the display contents in the case where the sum of the number of reserved balls based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the number of reserve balls based on the entrance to each second entrance is six. And six circular holding symbols are displayed in the holding display area Ds1b. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b is updated in synchronization with the actual number of reserved balls. In addition, the hold symbols displayed in the hold display area Ds1b are displayed left-justified in order from the hold symbols corresponding to the hold balls that are older in time.

  In this control example, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the entrance to each second entrance (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r), Although it is configured to be able to hold up to 4 times, the upper limit value of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, even if set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) good. Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the retained balls for entering the respective second entrances (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r). The upper limit of the number is not limited to the same. The upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for the entrance to the first entrance 64 may be increased or less than the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for the entrance to each second entrance. Good. Further, instead of displaying the holding symbol in the holding display area Ds1b, a mode in which the number of held balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63, a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. This continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) includes the number of reserved balls (retained balls of special symbol 1) based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and each second entrance (second entrance). 640, an effect that may be executed when the total value of the number of reserved balls (the reserved balls of the special symbol 2) based on the incoming ball to the right second entrance port 640r) is eight. .

  FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the start of eight hold effects is determined. If a total of the eighth entry is put on hold during the variation display of the third symbol, it is determined whether or not the eight hold effects are to be executed one second before the end of the variation display. Although the details will be described later, the eight-holding effect is configured such that execution becomes easier to be determined as a lottery result with high expectation is held in the holding ball. Therefore, when eight hold effects are executed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that there is a big hit in the hold. When the start of the eight-holding effect is determined, the characters “Preparing for fish school mode” are displayed above the variable display main display area Dm that is changing when the eighth ball is held. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the eight hold effects are executed before the effects are started. Therefore, it can be expected that one of the eight fluctuation displays on hold will be a big hit.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when eight hold effects are being executed. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), when eight hold effects are executed, the characters “fish school mode” are displayed on the upper part of the main display area Dm. In addition, many fish (fish school) appear on the back surface of the sub display area Ds. By changing the display mode (rear surface) of the execution display area Ds1a and the hold display area Ds1b, the player is informed that the expectation of the currently running change display and the hold change display is high. It can be easily recognized.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a special press effect that may be executed in the eight hold effects. This special press effect is determined whether or not to be executed when reach occurs in the eight-hold effect. Note that the reach is a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed only in the middle symbol row Z2 in the variable display, and on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This is a mode in which a main symbol with the same number is displayed in a stopped state and suggests that the main symbol with the same number is an opportunity to be aligned on the active line. The example shown in FIG. 61 shows a state in which two main symbols with the number “1” are stopped and displayed on the effective line L3. In this case, since the main symbol with the number “1” attached to the right side of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot stop symbol, so that the player is expected to win a big hit. be able to.

  When reach occurs in the eight hold effects and execution of the special press effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 61, an image of a button with the characters “PUSH” displayed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying the image of this button, the player can be prompted to press the frame button 22. In addition, when the player presses the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 61 (the state where the button image is displayed), the lottery is performed on the condition that the variable display being executed corresponds to the jackpot. When winning, a special notification sound (confirmed notification sound) is output. By outputting this special notification sound, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current variation display is a big hit before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In this control example, when it is determined to output a special notification sound, the output of the special notification sound is not limited to one time, and can be output a plurality of times according to the player's operation on the frame button 22. Yes. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be operated many times while the button image is displayed for a player who wants to listen to the special notification sound. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, in addition to the special press effect, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is provided. Hereinafter, a press effect other than the special press effect is referred to as a normal press effect in order to distinguish it from the special press effect. In this normal pressing effect, for example, the frame button 22 is prompted to be pressed when developing into super reach, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of super reach is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, transition of the display mode of the sub display area Ds during execution of the eight hold effects will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 62, the transition of the display mode in the case where a new winning is not detected during the period from the start of execution of the eight hold effects until the end will be described.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode of the sub display area Ds in the case where the first variable display is being executed after the eight on-hold effects are started. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when a special symbol lottery based on the first reserved ball (the oldest held ball in time) is executed, and a variable display indicating the lottery result is executed, the hold display is performed. The reserved symbols displayed in the area Ds1b are shifted and displayed one by one on the execution display area Ds1a side. As a result, the hold symbol is not displayed at the right end of the hold display area Ds1b. Even in this case, the fish school display on the back surface is continuously displayed on the entire sub display area Ds. Then, regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of displayed symbols on hold), the school of fish display throughout the sub display area Ds continues during execution of the eight hold effects. Thereby, it is possible to display the fish school display indicating whether or not the eight rendition effects are being executed in a wider display range regardless of the number of reserved balls. Moreover, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the case where the display area of the fish school display is changed according to the number of reserved balls.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the holding symbol displayed in the holding display area Ds1b disappears, and the sub-display area Ds is also displayed while the variable display based on the last (eighth) holding ball is being executed. The whole school of fish display continues. Then, when the variable display based on the last holding ball of the eight hold effects is finished and the lottery result is out, the back of the sub display area Ds is then returned to the normal back (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the eight hold effects have ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the transition of the display mode when a new winning is detected during the period from the start to the end of execution of the eight hold effects will be described. In a state where the eight hold effects are executed and the back surface of the sub display area Ds is displayed as a school of fish (see FIG. 63 (a)), the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the second entry on the right side. When a new winning is detected for the ball opening 640r, the display areas after the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning are set in different modes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the display area on the right side of the sub display area Ds including the holding symbol corresponding to the new holding ball is a display mode in which a large number of bubbles are displayed on the back surface ( Bubble display). On the other hand, the rear side of the display area on the left side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball is held as a school of fish display. In this way, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball that was held at the time when the eight-holding effect was started, and the holding ball that did not exist at the time when the eight-holding effect was started (the eight holding effect is executed) By making the back image different from the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball that is not used to determine whether or not to do so, the player can clearly recognize how far the eight hold effect continues. Can do. Hereinafter, for the convenience of explanation, it is divided into an area for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that has been held at the time when the eight reserved effects are started, and an area for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball. This display mode is called “divided display”.

  This divided display is continued until the variable display corresponding to the eight reserved balls that are the targets of the eight reserved effects ends. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the variable display corresponding to the eighth holding ball in the eight holding effect is executed, the entire holding display area Ds1b is set to the bubble display, and the execution display area Only Ds1a is displayed as a school of fish. In this state, when the last variation effect of the eight on-hold effects is finished and the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped and displayed, the normal display mode is displayed after the next change as shown in FIG. Return to. That is, not only the fish school display but also the bubble display is canceled. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the eight hold effects have ended.

  As described above, in the first control example, when a new start winning is detected during execution of the eight on-hold effects, and the number of reserved balls increases, it corresponds to the on-hold ball that is the target of the eight on-hold effects. The reserved symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball are divided and displayed. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the eight-holding effect ends, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player is notified at the end of the eight-holding effect. There is a risk of feeling uncomfortable. Although the reserved symbol is displayed, the sub display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the eight hold effects have ended halfway. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the divided display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how far the eight hold effects will continue when a new start winning is detected. This can prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-holding effect.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 64) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot type (the jackpot symbol) used for selection Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select a stop type of detachment in a special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and initial value setting of first random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for the above is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 89). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning for the first entrance 64 and each second entrance (second entrance 640, There is provided a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning for the right second entrance 640r). As described above, in the present control example, up to four reserved balls are provided for each of the first entrance 64 and each second entrance. For this reason, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is special. When the ball is won in any of the second entrances stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the counter value that is the oldest in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes for variably displaying the special symbol 2 (dynamic display) are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn, such as during special symbol fluctuation display or during a big hit game, the ball wins at the first entrance 64 or each second entrance, and the winning When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. Further, when the corresponding reserved number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is not acquired and only the prize balls (5 prize balls in this embodiment) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and each second entrance, but is not limited thereto, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 89).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (second entry). The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the ball entrance 640 and the right second entrance entrance 640r). The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is defined in a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit specified in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol big hit.

  Here, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery Is “7”, and if it is “7”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery is within the range of “0-9”. If it is within the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special It becomes the thing at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7” is the special symbol big-random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/400”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are ten values of the first per-random number counter C1 which is a special symbol jackpot, and the random value “0-9” is the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/40”.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. And, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, any one of the big hits A to C based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). The jackpot type will be selected.

  Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the jackpot type selection table 202b, the jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), “big hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 47”. The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a special symbol probability changing state. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player, the “jackpot A” is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 48 random numbers are selected for “big hit A”. The ratio at which “is selected” is 48%.

  Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “48 to 87”, “big hit B” is defined in association with it. This “jackpot B” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a short time state of a normal symbol. Since the number of rounds is the largest in line with “Big jackpot A”, it is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of winning balls that the player can obtain, but since the probability variation state is not given after the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is the most disadvantageous It becomes. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 40 random numbers for which “big hit B” is selected. The ratio at which “is selected” is 40%.

  Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “88 to 99”, “big hit C” is defined in association with it. This “jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is two and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability changing state. Since the number of rounds is the smallest, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that a player can obtain, but since a probabilistic state is given after the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 12 random number values for which “big hit C” is selected. The rate at which “big hit C” is selected is 12%.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is changed to the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (second entrance). The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the ball entrance 640 and the right second entrance entrance 640r).

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 89) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the ball passes through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67. Is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes a normal symbol is defined in the random number table 202c per normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number value specified in the random number table 202c per normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit. Details of the normal symbol random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 66C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol random number table 202c, there are 21 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is “5 to 20”. . The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random number values that can be won is 16, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “16/240”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds” when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and frequency may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. .

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 89).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as a part of the fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type selection table 202b, a regular symbol random number table 202c, and At least a variation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

  The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66 (a)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored as described above. The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored. As described above, the judgment values of the first jackpot type counter C2 include It is defined in association with the jackpot type. The normal symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) is a data table in which the normal symbol hit determination value is stored as described above. Since these tables have already been described in detail together with descriptions of various counters, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG.

  FIG. 67A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example selects the variation pattern when the gaming state is the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). The normal table 202d1 used for the purpose and the non-normal table 202d2 used for selecting a variation pattern in a game state (probability change state or time-short state) other than the normal state.

  First, the details of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the normal table 202d1 is provided with a table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is a big win and a table that is referred to when the special symbol is lost. In each table, for each symbol stop type (stop symbol), the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), for the success / failure determination result and the stop types being the big hits A and B, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 29”. Is defined in association with the normal reach A per 30 seconds, and the super reach A is defined in the range of “30 to 198” in association with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Also, for the big hit C stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the normal reach B per 34 seconds of fluctuation time in the range of “0 to 100”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is In the range of “101 to 198”, super reach B is defined in association with the fluctuation time of 64 seconds.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 is different according to the total number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls is 0 to 4, with respect to a completely out of stop type, all the possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are out of a variation length A of 10 seconds. Are defined in association with each other. Further, for reach stop types other than front / rear deviation, the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99” is defined by associating normal reach A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in association with “100 to 198”. In this range, a super-reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of front / rear out of reach, all values that can be taken by the change type counter CS1 are defined in association with out super reach with a change time of 60 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls is 5 to 7, with respect to a completely out of stop type, all the possible values of the variation type counter CS1 have a variation time of 5 seconds with a short variation A. It is defined in association. Further, for reach stop types other than front / rear deviation, the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 150” is defined by associating normal reach A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds associated with “151 to 198”. In this range, a super-reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of front / rear out of reach, all values that can be taken by the change type counter CS1 are defined in association with out super reach with a change time of 60 seconds.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls increases (becomes five or more), it becomes easier to select a variation pattern having a shorter variation time than when the number of reserved balls is small. Therefore, since the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the fluctuation can be reduced, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are further made with the upper limit number (8 in total) of the reserve balls. It can be suppressed that a sphere enters the mouth 640 and the second right entrance 640r and becomes an invalid ball. In addition, when the number of balls to be held is small, it is possible to easily generate a new start prize during a long variation time by configuring the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time to be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding ball from being lost during the game and the change display to be interrupted, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Next, the details of the non-normal table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, for the hit determination result and the stop type jackpot A and B, the normal reach A is obtained when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49” and the fluctuation time is 30 seconds. The super reach A is defined in association with each other in the range of “50 to 198” with a variation time of 60 seconds. Also, for the big hit C stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the normal reach B per 34 seconds of fluctuation time in the range of “0 to 100”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is In the range of “101 to 198”, super reach B is defined in association with the fluctuation time of 64 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the determination result is out of place, as in the normal table 202d1, the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 differs according to the total number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, with respect to a completely out of stop type, all the possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are out of variation length B with a variation time of 7 seconds. Are defined in association with each other. Also, for reach stop types other than front / rear out, all values that can be taken by the value of the change type counter CS1 are defined in association with a normal reach B with a change time of 15 seconds, and In other words, all values that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with super-reach in which the variation time is 60 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls is 3 to 7, with respect to a completely out of stop type, all the possible values of the variation type counter CS1 have a variation time of 2 seconds and a short variation B. It is defined in association. Further, with respect to reach stop types other than forward / backward deviation, all values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined in association with a normal reach B with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Further, for the stop type of the front / rear out of reach, the outreach super reach with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As described above, in the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, a variation pattern having a shorter time is easily selected compared to the normal state. Thereby, the game efficiency in an advantageous probability change state or a time-short state can be improved.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, an hour and middle counter 203g, a probability variation flag 203h, a variation order storage area 203i, a variation execution flag 203j, and a jackpot medium flag 203k And the other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, which are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the start winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Apart from the big win lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1). The prediction of information is described as prefetching a lottery result of a special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data (each counter C1-C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning at each second entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r). Each value) is stored.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (hold first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol 1 variable display (in the third symbol display device 81) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display to be performed. The initial value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S604 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 79).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to each second entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of one variation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81). The value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to an initial value of zero as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Each time the number of reserved balls of design 2 increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S612 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S211 in FIG. 79).

  These special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variable display holding number N1 in special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display holding number N2 in special symbol 2) are held balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a number command (see S207 and S212 in FIG. 79, and S605 and S613 in FIG. 83). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. Command.

  The sound lamp controller 113 controls the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the normal symbol variation display is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 85).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 86: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and every time the jackpot B is reached, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot B. . That is, when “big hit B” is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / minute counter 203g (see S1212 in FIG. 90). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the display of the variation of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the hour / middle counter 203g becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 79).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h, which will be described later, is OFF, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. (See S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

  The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203h is on, Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable state. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability variation flag 203h is initially set to off, and is set to on whenever the “big hit A, C” end timing is reached. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203h is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of jackpot is set.

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 82) are executed by the MPU 201, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process and the special symbol 2 variation start process, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and The special symbol 2 will be drawn. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is OFF, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability (S403, S404 in FIG. 81, S503 in FIG. 82). , S504).

  In this control example, while the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the short time state of the normal symbol is also set. For this reason, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g and the probability variation flag 203h are referred to and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-short state. Specifically, if the value of the hour / short counter 203g is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203h is on (if it is a time reduction state or a probability change state), it is determined that the symbol is a time reduction state of a normal symbol, Based on the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, lottery of normal symbols is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off (not in either the time shortening state or the probability variation state), the normal symbol A lottery is performed (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

  The fluctuation order storage area 203i stores information indicating the order in which the data (holding balls) stored in the holding areas of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b are stored. This is a storage area. This variable order storage area 203i is composed of eight reserved areas and one execution area, and each area is data for identifying whether a special symbol 1 lottery or a special symbol 2 lottery is selected. Is stored. Specifically, for example, if 01H is stored, it means that the lottery of special symbol 1 is suspended, and if 02H is stored, it means that the lottery of special symbol 2 is suspended. means. If 00H is stored, it means that it is an empty area.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r). The value corresponding to the entered entrance is stored in the lowest area (the area with the smaller area number) among the empty areas of the eight reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved eighth area) (S607 in FIG. 83). , S615). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, the data stored in variation order storage area 203i is shifted (moved) to the execution area side and moved to that execution area. Based on the information, it is determined whether to execute the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 (see S304 and S306 in FIG. 80).

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding eighth area) is packed into a holding area (holding first area to holding seventh area) having a smaller area number. Done. By referring to this change order storage area 203i at the start of change, the lottery of special symbols can be executed in order from the reserved balls that are older in time.

  The variation execution flag 203j is used to draw a special symbol based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 when the variation display is finished in a state where the reserved ball exists (the lottery condition for the next special symbol is satisfied), It is a flag indicating whether or not to draw a special symbol based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The variation execution flag 203j is composed of 2 bits, and the upper bit corresponds to the special symbol 1 and the lower bit corresponds to the special symbol 2. If each bit is on, it means that it is the execution timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to that bit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the execution timing of the fluctuation display. This variation execution flag 203j is determined after determining the type of the retained ball that is the oldest in terms of time (whether it is the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) from the data in the variation order storage area 203i. Then, it is updated to a state corresponding to the determined type (see S305 and S307 in FIG. 80).

  The big hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If this jackpot flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. The jackpot flag 203k is set to ON when the jackpot start is set (see S221 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S1214 in FIG. 90).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 69, the ROM 222 has a sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a press-down notice selection table 222b, a back face switching table 222c, a special back face switching table 222d, a continuous notice lottery table 222e, and an operation scenario table 222f. And a production upper limit number of times table 222g.

  The sub variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to select a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the rough variation effect (variation display) aspect notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table to be. In this sub variation pattern selection table 222a, a detailed variation effect mode is defined in association with a value of a sub variation selection counter 223t described later. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a (see S3505 in FIG. 106).

  The push-down notice selection table 222b is a table for selecting a notice effect type (notice type) to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 in the normal push effect. Details of the push-down notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the push-down notice selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the push-down notice selection table 222b is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter and the notice type for each stop type in the variable display in which the normal press effect is set. Has been. The effect counter is configured as a loop counter that is periodically updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated in, for example, main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. (Not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 70A, when the stop types are jackpots A and B, the notice type of “fish school” is defined in association with the range of the effect counter value “0 to 120”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter is “121 to 198”, the notice type of “bubble” is defined in association with it. Although illustration is omitted, the notice type of “fish school” indicates a notice effect in which the fish school crosses the back of the third figure displayed on the third figure display device 81, and the notice type of “bubble” is the third figure. The notice effect that bubbles are generated on the back of is shown.

  When the stop type is jackpot C, the notice type of “bubble” is defined in association with all possible values of the effect counter. On the other hand, when the front / rear is out of reach, the notice counter type of “Fish” is defined in association with the range of the production counter value “0-15”, and the notice type of “bubble” is set in the range “16-198”. Are defined in association with each other.

  In this way, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds of big hits A and B, the ratio of selecting “fish school” as the notice type is higher than in the case of out-of-front reach, so the notice effect of “fish school” occurs In this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. On the other hand, the notice type of “bubble” is easily selected in the case of jackpot C or out-of-front reach. In other words, when the “foam” notice effect is generated and the jackpot is won, the possibility of “jackpot C” increases. As described above, when the “big hit C” is reached, the gaming state after the big win is set to a probable change state, which is an advantageous state in which the possibility of a big hit again becomes high at a short interval (small number of lotteries). Therefore, when the notice effect of “bubble” occurs, it is possible to make the player more strongly wish that it will be a big hit.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The back switching table 222c is a table that defines the order of the stages (back images) that are changed when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect has not occurred.

  Details of the back surface switching table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back surface switching table 222c. As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in this back surface switching table 222c, the value of the mode counter 223i whose value is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the back image type (back surface type). It is defined in association. The mode counter 223i increments the value by 1 in the range of “1-3” every time the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the stage (back surface type) can be changed and the stage (back surface type) is changed. Is done. If the stage is changed while the value of the mode counter 223i is “3”, the value is updated to “1”.

  As shown in FIG. 70B, the back A (morning stage) is defined in association with the value “1” of the mode counter 223i, and the back B (evening stage) is associated with “2”. The rear surface C (night stage) is defined in association with “3”. Therefore, every time the player operates the frame button 22, the back surface type can be changed from back A → back B → back C →. Therefore, since the back type can be changed according to the player's mood, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The special back surface switching table 222d is a table that defines the order of special stage types (special back surface types) to be set during a specific time zone when the time measured by the RTC 292 falls within a specific time zone. Details of the special back surface switching table 222d will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special back surface switching table 222d. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), this special back surface switching table 222d has a special mode counter 223m whose value is updated every specific time zone (every hour after the power is turned on, 3 minutes). And the type of special stage (special back surface type) are defined in association with each other. The special mode counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a new special stage is set (a specific time zone is entered) in the range of “1-3”. When the value of the special mode counter 223m is “3” and the stage is changed, the value is updated to “1” as with the mode counter 223i.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the special back surface A (town stage) is defined in association with the value “1” of the special mode counter 223m, and the special back surface B (forest stage) is defined with respect to “2”. The special back surface C (sea stage) is defined in association with “3”. Therefore, the special stage can be changed from special back A → special back B → special back C → ... as a special stage every time it is in a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on). it can. Therefore, since it can change to a different special stage according to a time slot | zone, the aspect of a special stage can be diversified.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The continuous notice lottery table 222e is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect (eight hold effect). When the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are each stored in the upper limit of four, and when it becomes 1 second before the end of the variable display being executed, this continuous notice is given. With reference to the lottery table 222e, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect (eight hold effect). Details of the continuous notice lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the continuous notice lottery table 222e defines the range of the value of the effect counter determined to execute the continuous notice effect for each lottery result of the special symbol. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect (eight-holding effect) is executed sequentially from the oldest holding ball in time to the eight holding balls. If it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed based on the determination for any of the reserved balls, even if there is an undetermined reserved ball, the determination is terminated at that time and the execution start of the continuous notice effect is set. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not to be executed in the determination made for all the eight reserved balls, the continuous notice effect is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the pre-read holding ball becomes the determination target when the fluctuation pattern becomes a super reach, the value of the effect counter is “0 to 0”. A continuous notice effect is set in the range of “180”. Of the 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken as the effect counter value, there are 181 counter values (random values) that are determined to execute the continuous notice effect. If there is a corresponding holding ball, a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) is set at a rate of approximately 91% (181/199).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off and the pre-read holding ball becomes the judgment target when the fluctuation pattern is off and the super reach is reached, the effect counter value is in the range of “0 to 99”. Continuous notice effect is set. Out of the 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken as the effect counter value, since 100 counter values (random values) are determined to execute the continuous notice effect, they fall out of the eight reserved balls and super reach When there is a holding ball corresponding to, a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) is set at a rate of about 50% (100/199).

  In addition, since it is not prescribed | regulated in the continuous notice lottery table 222e except for the two types of pre-read results described above (winning super reach, missed super reach), it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed regardless of the value of the effect counter. Never happen. In this way, by configuring the continuous notice effect only when the hold includes a super-reach or a hold ball corresponding to a missed super-reach, the player's jackpot when the continuous notice effect is started Can increase expectations for

  In the first control example, the continuous notice effect may be set only when there is a holding ball corresponding to the hit super reach or the missed super reach. However, the configuration is limited to this. Rather, it may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the case where a holding ball that causes reach is included, it may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the holding ball, or the holding ball is a holding ball that corresponds to a stop type that is completely out of hold. In this case, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined with a lower probability than when the reach occurs. Thereby, the execution frequency of a continuous notice effect can be raised.

  In the first control example, it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous notice effect for each of the eight reserved balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which acquires all the prefetch results of eight reservation balls, and determines at once whether the continuous notice effect is performed. Thereby, the processing load in the case of determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The operation scenario table 222f is a table that defines the light emission patterns (operation scenarios) of the LEDs 1 to 40 of the rotation unit 500. In the operation scenario table 222f, the lighting states of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae updated according to the number of operation steps of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500. Details of the operation scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in this operation scenario table 222f, a combination of lighting states (light emission pattern) to be set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is defined in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae. ing. The data indicating the lighting states of the LEDs 1 to 40 are each composed of 3 bits as shown in FIG. 71 (c), and indicate the lighting states of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED in order from the upper bit. . More specifically, if each bit is 1 (on), it means that the corresponding color LED is set to a lighting state, and if it is 0 (off), the corresponding color LED is turned off. Means to set. For example, if the data indicating the lighting state is “001B”, it means that the red and green LEDs are turned off and the blue LED is turned on. For example, if the data indicating the lighting state is “101B”, it means that the green LED is set to off and the red and blue LEDs are set to on. In this case, red and blue are synthesized and the diffuser plate looks purple.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (c), “000B” is defined in association with the value “00H” of the operation pointer 223ae as the lighting states of the LEDs 1 to 40. For this reason, while the value of the action pointer 223ae is “00H”, all the LEDs 1 to 40 are set to the off state. The value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the number of steps of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 (value of the step counter 223ad).

  Also, for the value “01H” of the action pointer 223ae, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 1 to 5, and “001B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 6 and 7. Yes. Although not shown in the figure, “001B” is defined in association with the lighting states of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. Thereby, when the drive motor 457 performs the rotation operation of 3 steps, the blue LEDs of the LEDs 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, and 13 are set in the lighting state from the 4th step. As a result, the right end of the fourth screen (LEDs 6 and 7), the fifth screen (LEDs 9 and 10), and the sixth screen (LEDs 12 and 13) of the “T” character displayed in the rotation display effect is displayed as an afterimage. Can be made.

  The value “02H” of the operation pointer 223ae is defined in association with “000B” as the lighting state of the LEDs 1, 3 to 5, and “001B” as the lighting state of the LEDs 2, 6, and 7. It is prescribed. Although not shown in the figure, “001B” is defined in association with the lighting states of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. Thereby, in addition to the right end of the fourth stroke (LEDs 6 and 7), the fifth stroke (LEDs 9 and 10), and the sixth stroke (LEDs 12 and 13) among the characters “T” displayed in the rotation display effect, 2 The right end of the image (LED 2) can be displayed as an afterimage.

  Thereafter, for each value of the action pointer 223ae, lighting states (light emission patterns) for the respective LEDs 1 to 40 for allowing display of the afterimages constituting the “winning” characters are defined. As the combination of the lighting states, one rotation of the rotation unit 500 is set. When the rotation unit 500 makes a round, the value of the operation pointer 223ae is reset to 00H, and the lighting state is set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 again from the top of the operation scenario table 222f. As a result, the lighting operations of the LEDs 1 to 40 for each turn can be made the same, so that the afterimage consisting of the “winning” characters described above with reference to FIG. 58 can be more reliably recognized by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The production upper limit number table 222g is a table in which an upper limit value of the number of executions of the jackpot production using the rotation unit 500 is defined. As described above, the rotation unit 500 includes the board member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted. Therefore, when a big hit effect using the rotation unit 500 is performed, the ICs and capacitors mounted on the LEDs 532 and the board. Generates heat when operating. For this reason, if the rotary unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor to the substrate melts due to heat generation, which may lead to poor contact. For this reason, in this control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined in the effect upper limit number table 222g. And when the production | presentation aspect accompanied by operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 is selected in the state which reached | attained the upper limit, it is set as the structure replaced with the alternative production which the rotation unit 500 does not operate | move. Thereby, since the frequency | count of operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, failures, such as a contact failure, can be prevented (suppressed). Details of the effect upper limit count table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the production upper limit count table 222g. As shown in FIG. 72, in this production upper limit count table 222g, each time zone and the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 in that time zone are defined in association with each other. The time zone is determined by the time measured by the RTC 292 that is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is counted by a rotation display number counter 223 x provided in the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the production upper limit number table 222g, “0 times” is defined as the upper limit number in association with the time zone “00:00 to 08:59”. Therefore, even if the effect that the rotation unit 500 operates in this time zone is selected, the rotation unit 500 does not operate and the alternative effect is executed. The reason why the rotation unit 500 is not operated during the time period of “00:00 to 08:59” is that it is outside the business hours of general halls. Outside the business hours of the hall, for example, an effect that the rotating unit 500 operates is executed by trial hitting of a store clerk, and when the upper limit is reached, the rotating unit 500 may be operated when the player plays a game. It becomes impossible. In order to avoid this situation, in this control example, the upper limit value is set to 0 so that the rotating unit 500 does not operate in the time zone of “00:00 to 08:59” where there is a high possibility of outside the business hours of the hall. ing.

  Also, “2 times” is defined as the upper limit number in association with the time period “09: 0 to 11:59”. Therefore, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be limited to a maximum of 2 times in about 3 hours. For the time period “12: 0 to 14:59”, “4 times” is defined as being associated with the upper limit number of times. For this reason, when the effect of the upper limit number (2 times) is executed in the time period of “09:00 to 11:59”, the rotation unit 500 can be operated up to twice. On the other hand, when the rotation unit 500 does not operate in the time period of “09: 0 to 11:59” (the value of the rotation display number counter 223x is 0), “12:00 to 14:59” The rotation unit 500 can be operated up to four times in the time zone. Similarly, in the subsequent time zones, the upper limit value increases twice every 3 hours. Thereby, since the frequency | count of operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed, it can prevent (suppress) that the board | substrate etc. inside the rotation unit 500 will be destroyed by a heat | fever. In addition, by defining a different upper limit number for each time zone, effects using the rotation unit 500 can appear evenly in each time zone.

  Temporarily, when it is set as the structure which prescribes | regulates only the total upper limit number of times after a power supply is turned on with respect to the pachinko machine 10 until a power supply is interrupted, it will be after a power supply is interrupted after reaching the upper limit number of times. During this time, it is impossible to execute an effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates. Therefore, the slower the time period for performing a technique, the lower the possibility that an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates can be seen. Therefore, an unfair feeling is felt for a player who can perform a game only at a later time period. There is a possibility of getting lost. On the other hand, in this control example, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is made different according to the time zone. Thereby, regardless of the time when the game is started, it is possible to execute an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates until the upper limit number of times in each time zone is reached. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who can play a game only in a late time zone to play a game with the expectation that an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a player who can play a game only in a late time zone from feeling unfair.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a time An effect execution flag 223g, an insertion time storage area 223h, a mode counter 223i, a pressing period timer 223j, a level storage area 223k, a special mode counter 223m, a touch effect effective time storage area 223o, an interval counter 223p, Continuous notice flag 223q, remaining notice counter 223r, split display flag 223s, sub-variation selection counter 223t, back change prohibition flag 223u, pressing effect flag 223v, special notification flag 223w, and number of rotation display With counter 223x A rotation counter 223Aa, a rotation display presentation flag 223Ab, a lighting setting flag 223Ac, and step counter 223Ad, and operation pointer 223Ae, a power-off flag 223Y, other memory areas 223z is at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning for the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640 r) is detected in the main controller 110. When a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn from the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired according to the start winning Various types of information (whether, big hit type, big hit type, fluctuation pattern) obtained are predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is received from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 as winning information. Notified by command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas (the first area to the first entrance 64) corresponding to the type of entrance (the first entrance 64 or each second entrance) that detected the entrance. Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  Based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect) can be executed is executed. By configuring so that a continuous notice effect (eight hold effect) can be executed before the change display corresponding to each hold ball is executed, each change ball is started before the change display is started. Can give the player a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable symbol display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect for each special symbol type. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is a variable symbol display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted. In this case, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3008 in FIG. 101). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. In order to notify the display controller 114 of the value of the stored special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls for the value of the ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3002 in FIG. 101), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3402 in FIG. 105). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3005 in FIG. 101), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3406 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f stores a random value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generating IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The operation clock (operation frequency) of the random number generating IC can be determined by updating each of the eight reserved balls to a different random number value when determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. An IC that can be operated with a moderate operation clock (for example, 1 MHz) is employed. The value of the effect counter 223f is used when executing various determinations executed by the audio lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and determining the notice type of the normal press effect.

  The time effect execution flag 223g indicates whether or not to execute an effect (time effect) for changing to a special stage (special back surface type) in a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on). Flag. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, an upper limit (for example, for three months) is provided in a period in which the time effect can be executed by the pachinko machine 10, and even after a certain time period has elapsed after the upper limit has passed. The time directing is not executed. Thereby, since the rarity of the time effect can be enhanced, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the upper limit period is reached. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the period until the upper limit period is reached can be improved. The time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON when the initial value is set to OFF and it is determined that the date and time when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the upper limit period in which the time effect can be executed (FIG. 92, S2103). On the other hand, since the contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up when the power is shut off, the RAM 223 is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  In addition, you may comprise so that execution is possible, without providing the upper limit period of time production. In this case, since the time effect can be executed for a longer period, the pachinko machine 10 that can be enjoyed for a long time can be provided.

  The input time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the time when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As described above, in the first control example, a time effect (change to a special stage) is executed for 3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on. Whether or not to start execution of the time effect is determined by the difference between the time stored in the input time storage area 223h and the current time measured by the RTC 292. The turn-on time storage area 223h stores data corresponding to the time when the power-on time of the pachinko machine 10 is obtained from the RTC 292 (see S2104 in FIG. 92).

  As described above, the mode counter 223i is used when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which the rear face type (stage) can be changed (outside the normal pressing effect, the special pressing effect, the time effect, and the jackpot period). This is a storage area for storing data indicating the rear face type to be changed. The mode counter 223i is composed of counters that can take four types of values from 0 to 3. "1", "2", and "3" are the back A (morning stage), the back B (evening stage), and the back, respectively. Corresponds to C (night stage). Further, “0” is a value that can be taken only at the time of initialization, and indicates a state in which the back surface type is not set. The mode counter 223i is updated by 1 each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the period in which the back surface type can be changed (see S2402 in FIG. 95), and the back surface type corresponding to the updated counter value. Is set. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the value of the mode counter 223i is “2” (a state where the back surface B is set), the value of the mode counter 223i is updated to “3”. The back surface type is changed to the back surface C corresponding to the updated value “3”. Note that if the value of the mode counter 223i is updated while the upper limit value “3” is set, the value is set to “1”. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a process is executed in which the value is updated from the initial value “0” to “1” and the back surface A is set as the back surface type (see S2105 in FIG. 92). .

  The pressing period timer 223j is a timer that measures the period during which the frame button 22 can be accepted when a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is executed. When the execution start timing of the normal press effect or the special press effect is reached, a timer value (effect period) corresponding to the type of the press effect to be executed is set for the press period timer 223j (S2602 in FIG. 97). The value is subtracted by 1 in the special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96) or the press effect setting process (see FIG. 97) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 93). (See S2507 in FIG. 96 and S2606 in FIG. 97). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more, an effect corresponding to the pressing effect being executed is executed.

  The level storage area 223k is a storage area in which information indicating an effect level (effect mode) of a touch effect that is one of the interesting effects in the first control example is stored. In the first control example, the touch sensor 290 is mounted on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that it can be determined whether or not the player has touched the screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the first control example, an entertainment effect using the touch sensor 290 is configured to be executable. Specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect (touch effect) that prompts the user to touch the screen is executed (not shown). This touch effect may be set during the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot, and the mode changes each time the player touches the screen (for example, an indicator displayed on the third symbol display device 81) (Increase)) is performed. In this touch effect, for example, the maximum value of the indicator is determined in advance for each jackpot type, and when the jackpot A is the most advantageous for the player, the indicator becomes Max. In other words, if a touch effect appears during the fluctuation, the jackpot is fixed at that time, and if the displayed indicator becomes Max, it will be determined that it will be the most advantageous jackpot A. Can touch the screen.

  Note that this touch effect is executed as an alternative effect of the effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates. This is because the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the rotation operation range of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other in this control example. That is, if the touch effect and the rotation display effect are executed at the same time, the player may touch the rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit 500 may be damaged or the player may be injured. Further, since it is difficult to touch the touch sensor 290 by being blocked by the rotary unit 500, there is a risk of stressing the player. Therefore, in this control example, the touch effect is used only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 has reached the upper limit number so that the operation of the rotation unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not conflict. Is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from occurring at the same time, so that the player touches the rotary unit 500 and is injured or the rotary unit 500 is damaged. It is possible to prevent the player from being stressed due to difficulty in touching the touch panel (touch sensor 290).

  The level storage area 223k stores information corresponding to how much the effect mode has changed in this touch effect (change amount of the indicator). Each time it is detected that the player touches the screen in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated within the range below the upper limit value, and the display mode (amount of indicator) corresponding to the updated data is set. The In addition, when a player's touch is not detected for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in a direction to decrease the amount of the indicator, and the updated data A display mode corresponding to is set. During the execution of the touch effect, the screen can be positively touched by the player by adopting a configuration in which the indicator amount is reduced if no touch operation is performed.

  The special mode counter 223m stores a value corresponding to the type of the special stage set in the time effect when the execution condition of the time effect is satisfied (the time measured by the RTC 292 is a specific time zone). It is a counter. The special mode counter 223m is incremented by 1 in the range of “1-3” each time a new specific time zone is entered, and a special back surface type corresponding to the value after the addition is set. Also, when the value of the special mode counter 223m is “3” and a new specific time zone is reached, the value is updated to “1” as in the mode counter 223i. As described above, the values “1”, “2”, and “3” of the special mode counter 223m are the special back surface A (town stage), the special back surface B (Morikata stage), and the special back surface C (sea stage), respectively. Corresponding to

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223o is a storage area for storing a period in which a touch on the screen (detection by the touch sensor 290) is treated as valid in the touch effect. In the touch effect effective time storage area 223o, the effective time corresponding to the touch effect is stored at the start of the touch effect, and the effective time is subtracted every time the touch sensor control process is executed (S2702 in FIG. 98). reference). Only when the effective time stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o remains, the effect for the player touching the screen is set.

  The interval counter 223p is a counter for counting a period during which the touch sensor 290 is off during a touch effect (a period during which the player does not touch the screen). As described above, in the touch effect of this control example, if no player touch is detected for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds), the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in a direction to decrease the amount of the indicator. Then, a display mode corresponding to the updated data is set. Whether or not an effect of reducing the amount of the indicator is executed is determined by the value of the interval counter 223p.

  The continuous notice flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects, see FIG. 60B) is being executed. If the continuous notice flag 223q is on, it indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not being executed. The continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON when execution of the continuous notice effect is set (see S3808 in FIG. 109). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the continuous notice effect (see S3206 in FIG. 103).

  The remaining notice number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the remaining number of continuous notice effects (the number of times of change display). The continuous notice effect continues over the variable display of the number of values stored in the remaining notice number counter 223r. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the remaining notice number counter 223r is set to 8 (see S3807 in FIG. 109), and every time the start of variable display is set during the continuous notice effect. The value is subtracted by 1 (see S3508 in FIG. 106).

  The split display flag 223s is displayed in the sub display area Ds in a split display (see FIG. 63) based on the fact that a new start winning is detected and the number of held balls increases during execution of the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set. If this split display flag 223s is on, it indicates that split display is set, and if it is off, it indicates that split display is not set. As described above, the split display changes the back side between the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball that is the target of the continuous notice effect and the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball that is not the target of the continuous notice effect, and up to which holding symbol It is a display mode for clarifying whether or not it should be expected. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the eight-holding effect ends, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player is notified at the end of the eight-holding effect. There is a risk of feeling uncomfortable. Although the reserved symbol is displayed, the sub display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the eight hold effects have ended halfway. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the divided display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how far the eight hold effects will continue when a new start winning is detected. This can prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-holding effect.

  The sub variation selection counter 223t is a counter used for selecting a detailed display mode of the variation pattern from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a. In the sub-variation selection counter 223t, the random value acquired from the random number generating IC is stored in the same manner as the effect counter 223f. As described above, in the sub variation pattern selection table 222a, a detailed variation pattern display mode is defined in association with the value range of the sub variation selection counter 223t. By adopting a configuration in which the display mode of the variation pattern is selected using the sub variation selection counter 223t, the display mode can be selected at random.

  The back surface change prohibition flag 223u is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which it is prohibited to change the back surface type when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. It is a period. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a period in which the rear surface type can be changed according to the operation of the frame button 22. Note that the period during which the change of the back surface type is prohibited is specifically during execution of a normal press effect or special press effect, during execution of a time effect, or during a big hit.

  The pressing effect flag 223v is a flag indicating whether a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is being executed. This pressing effect flag 223v is composed of, for example, 2 bits, and the upper bit is a flag corresponding to the normal pressing effect, and the lower bit is a flag corresponding to the special pressing effect. If each bit is 1 (on), it means that the pressing effect corresponding to the 1 (on) bit is being executed, and if it is 0 (off), the corresponding pressing effect is not being executed. Indicates. Specifically, if the pressing effect flag 223v is “10B” in binary notation, it indicates that the normal pressing effect is being executed, and if it is “01B”, the special pressing effect is being executed. Indicates. Further, “00B” indicates that any pressing effect is not executed. In the pressing effect flag 223v, the bit corresponding to the type of the pressing effect to be started is set to 1 (on) when the pressing effect start timing is reached (see S2603 in FIG. 97), and the pressing effect end timing is reached. Is set to 0 (off) (see S2609 in FIG. 97).

  The special notification flag 223w is a flag indicating whether or not a special notification sound can be output during execution of the special press effect (see FIG. 61). If this special notification in-progress flag 223w is on, it indicates that the special notification sound can be output, and if it is off, it indicates that the special notification sound cannot be output. As described above, if it is determined that the special notification sound is output in the special press effect by lottery, the special notification sound is output every time the frame button 22 is operated until the special press effect ends. The state to be set is set. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be operated many times during execution of the special press effect for the player who wants to listen to the special notification sound. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. The special notification in-progress flag 223w is set to ON when the special notification sound execution lottery is won (see S2504 in FIG. 96), and is set to OFF at the end of the special press effect (see S2510 in FIG. 96).

  The rotation display number counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of executions of the effect (rotation display effect) in which the rotation unit 500 operates, and 1 is added to the value every time the rotation display effect is executed (FIG. 107). S3606). When a mode with a rotation display effect is selected from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a based on the change pattern command, the value of the rotation display number counter 223x and the upper limit specified in the effect upper limit number table 222g described above. In comparison with the value, it is determined whether the rotation display effect is set as it is as the mode of the current variation pattern or the touch effect is set as an alternative effect. In this determination, as described above, when the value of the rotation display number counter 223x reaches the upper limit value, it is determined that an alternative effect is set. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the rotation unit 500 from operating frequently by avoiding that the rotation display effect is executed more times than the upper limit value and executing the alternative effect. Therefore, failure of the rotation unit 500 can be prevented (suppressed).

  The rotation number counter 223aa is a counter that counts the number of rotations of the rotation unit 500. Here, the rotation unit 500 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown). This origin sensor is already known and will be described briefly. However, when the rotation unit 500 is at the origin position (the rotation position shown in FIG. 35A), the output is turned on (H), This is a sensor whose output is turned off (L) when the rotational position deviates from the position (for example, a rotational position different from the arrangement of FIG. 35A, such as the rotational position shown in FIG. 35B). Since this origin sensor is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 monitors the output of the origin sensor to determine whether the rotational position of the rotary unit 500 is the origin position. It is possible to easily determine whether or not. The rotation number counter 223aa adds 1 to the value every time the rotation sensor 500 starts rotating and the origin sensor is turned on by the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 (every rotation of the rotation unit 500) (S2902 in FIG. 100). reference). The execution start of the rotation display effect is set according to the value of the rotation number counter 223aa.

  The rotation display effect flag 223ab is a flag indicating whether or not the rotation display effect is being executed. If the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the rotation display effect is outside the execution period. The rotation display effect flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the rotation display effect is reached (see S2803 in FIG. 99), and is set to OFF when it is determined that the end timing of the rotation display effect is reached. (See S2807 in FIG. 99).

  The lighting setting completed flag 223ac is a flag indicating whether or not the setting of the light emission pattern defined in the operation scenario table 222f is started in the rotation display effect. If the lighting set flag 223ac is on, it means that the setting of the light emission pattern has been started, and if it is off, it indicates that the light emission pattern has not been set. While the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is on, the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the driving amount (rotation amount) of the driving motor 457, and the lighting setting corresponding to the updated value is read from the operation scenario table 222f. And set to each LED1-40.

  The step counter 223ad is a counter that counts the number of drive steps of the drive motor 457. The drive of the drive motor 457 is controlled by a known motor driver. That is, by outputting a command for notifying the motor driver of operation conditions such as the rotation speed from the sound lamp control device 113, the drive motor 457 is controlled by the motor driver with the operation content corresponding to the command. Specifically, the motor driver varies the operation speed (rotational speed) of the drive motor 457 by varying the output frequency of the control signal for setting the one-step operation for the drive motor 457 according to the command. be able to. The motor driver outputs an execution signal for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the operation of one step is set every time the operation of one step is set for the drive motor 457. The value of the step counter 223ad is updated according to the number of times this execution signal is received. Based on the value of the step counter 223ad, the progress of the rotation operation can be accurately grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In the first control example, the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a rotation speed of, for example, 0.1 second per revolution. In addition, the rotation unit 500 is configured to operate only 1/100 turn by one step operation of the drive motor 457. Therefore, in this control example, the drive motor 457 is controlled at a speed of one step per millisecond. Accordingly, during the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, an execution signal is output from the motor driver every 1 millisecond.

  The action pointer 223ae is a pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the action scenario table 222f. Each time the value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated, the light emission pattern corresponding to the updated pointer value is read from the operation scenario table 222f and set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and executing the power-off process (see S2218 in FIG. 93). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 91), when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 2008: Yes in FIG. 91), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S2009 in FIG. 91). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads out the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 77), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is played by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or each second input A power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the ball entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r) is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 110).

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can check the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. Can do. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in this control example, three types of back images for normal use and back images for time effects (back A to C, special back) A to C) are set. Of these six types of back images, the back image corresponding to the back A which is the initial setting is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, the other back images are transferred to the normal video RAM 236 when the change condition for each back surface type is satisfied.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 59 (b)) with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. The As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes after the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (second entrance 640, right side second entrance 640r) has entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the changing effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the effect being started.

  In the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the sub symbol not numbered is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “youth” and “female” are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Thus, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character in the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. Flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, new reserved ball number flag 233m, reserved symbol number counter 233n, new continuous notice command flag 233o, continuous notice information storage area 233p, error occurrence flag 233q, error determination flag 233r, rear image change flag 233w and at least a rear image discrimination flag 233x.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the sub-designs without the numerals “1” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as youth images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (“morning stage”, “evening stage”, or “night stage”), or the back surface A to Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C (special back surfaces A to C, etc.). .

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the rear surfaces A to E as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that any of the rear surfaces A to C is displayed. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 75) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 76 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 76).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 76, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 76, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is a main image executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 110) (see S6005 in FIG. 110). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, an image other than the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is set to OFF (see S7805 in FIG. 121 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 112B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 112B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7701 in FIG. 121A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 121 (b)). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 77) described below describing the image drawing instruction content for the is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 77) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 77), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 112 (b) ) (See S6303)), pointer update processing (see S7404 in FIG. 118) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 77), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 77, the back image used for one frame image, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol) 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol ) Describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 112 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7406 in FIG. 118). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7913 in FIG. 122). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “off” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7914 in FIG. 122). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8002 in FIG. 123).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 112B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The new reserved ball number flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not to change the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. If this new reserved ball number flag 233m is on, it means that the number of symbols to be held is changed based on the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not changed ( This means that the display hold ball number command has not been received). The new reserved ball number flag 233m is set to ON when the display reserved ball number command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 116A). The new reserved ball number flag 233m is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7501 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of changing the number of displayed retained symbols is executed (FIG. 119, S7503). Thereby, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The reserved symbol number counter 233n is a counter that counts the number of displayed reserved symbols. The number of reserved symbols corresponding to the counter value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b. The value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command every time a display reserved ball number command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S7003 in FIG. 116).

  The new continuous notice command flag 233o is a flag for determining whether or not to update the display setting of the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect). If this new continuous notice command flag 233o is on, it means that the display setting of the continuous notice effect is updated based on the continuous notice command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not updated. Means that. The new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to ON when the display continuous notice command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7101 in FIG. 116B). The new continuous notice command flag 233o is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7504 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of changing the number of held symbols to be displayed is executed (see FIG. 119 (see S7506). Thereby, it is possible to update to the display mode corresponding to the display continuous notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the display continuous notice command is a command indicating the start of the continuous notice effect, a notice image (see FIG. 60A) corresponding to the start of the continuous notice effect is set (deployed). Is done. If the continuous display notice command for display indicates divided display (see FIG. 63), the divided display data of the distribution notified by the command is set (developed).

  The error occurrence flag 233q is a flag for determining whether an error has occurred. If the error occurrence flag 233q is on, it means that the warning image is set (developed), and if it is off, it means that it is not set. The error occurrence flag 233q is set to ON when an error command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7301 in FIG. 117 (b)). The error occurrence flag 233q is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7507 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of developing the warning image corresponding to the error type is executed ( (See S7509 in FIG. 119). As a result, a warning image corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The error determination flag 233r is a flag indicating the type of error when an error occurs. A corresponding warning image is displayed based on the type of error indicated by the error determination flag 233r. The error determination flag 233r is updated every time an error command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the error type indicated by the command (see S7302 in FIG. 117).

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7201 in FIG. 117 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7909 in FIG. 122), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7910 in FIG. 122). Thereby, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 117 (a ) (See S7202). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 78 to 90. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of the variable display hold in the special symbol) N2) is acquired (S203). Then, a variation execution determination process for determining the type of the special symbol for starting the variable display among the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is executed (S204). Details of the variation execution determination process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not to execute the variation display of the special symbol 1 based on the state of the variation execution flag 203j set in the variation execution determination processing (S204) (S205). . In the process of S205, when it is determined that the variable execution flag 203j is in a state indicating the variable execution in FIG. Therefore, the process proceeds to S206.

  In the process of S206, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set. (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 89) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display is executed on the first symbol display device 37 (S209), and this process is terminated. The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S205, when it is determined that the fluctuation execution flag 203j is not in a state corresponding to the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol 1 (that is, the upper bit is off) (S205: No), then the fluctuation execution flag It is determined whether or not 203j is in a state indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is on) (S210). In the process of S210, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is in a state indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (the lower bit is on) (S210: Yes), in order to start the variation display of the special symbol 2 , The process proceeds to S211.

  In the process of S211 to S213, the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 described above (the process of S206 to S208) is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). After the data is shifted, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S214), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S210, when it is determined that the state of the change execution flag 203j is not a state indicating the change start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is ON) (S210: No), this process ends. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. 81 or FIG. When the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, jackpot B or jackpot C is determined.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. Turn on the green LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the result (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S219). When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S219, if the jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89), the process branches to S1201: Yes, and the opening command Is set. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S219 ends, the probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is set to 0 (S220). The process of S220 is a process for making the jackpot state the same as the initial state. Next, the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON (S221), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is determined. Is 1 or more (S222: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203g (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S221, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S224). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78). The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is set to the value of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 00B to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and then data in the variation order storage area 203i is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the change order storage area 203i is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → first The data in each area is shifted, such as 5 areas, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304).

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data in the execution area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: Yes), the fluctuation execution flag 203j is the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol 1 Is set to 10B (S305), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is not data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: No), the data of the execution area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is the special symbol 2 It is determined whether or not the data indicates (S306). In the process of S306, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: Yes), the state of the variation execution flag 203j is set to 01B indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2. (S307), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the execution area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i is not data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol fluctuation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the various symbol counters stored in the execution area. Based on the value, a special symbol jackpot lottery (win / no-go determination) is performed, and a variation effect effect pattern (variation effect pattern) performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. It is.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area are acquired (S401).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a certain variation state (S402). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the probability variation is in progress, and when the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the probability variation is not occurring (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state).

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S402: Yes), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, A lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S403). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability change is not in progress (the probability change flag 203h is off) (S402: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S401. Based on the value of the random number counter C1 per 1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S404). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. “7” is set as the random value that is a special symbol jackpot. If the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “7”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S405.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode for the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the big hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (hits A, Among the jackpots B and jackpots C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 47”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16 rounds probable big hit), and if it is in the range of “48 to 87”, It is determined that the jackpot is B (16 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “88 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot is C (2 rounds probable jackpot) (see FIG. 66B).

  In the processing of S406, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  When the process of S406 is completed, next, a variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S407), and the process proceeds to S410. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S407, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d to determine the variation time of the symbol variation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the special symbol is out (S405: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the above, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as either front-rear outreach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete disengagement.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probabilistic state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. . Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S408, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S407 or the process of S409 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S407 or the process of S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 89). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S411 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214).

  The special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and shifted to the execution area with respect to the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81). The only difference is in determining the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern, and the others are the same, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 78), and the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right side 2 is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the entrance 640r), and when there is a starting winning, from the hold processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters, and the values indicated by the various random number counters held, This is a process for executing prefetching of a lottery result in a special symbol.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S601). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

  If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. Among these, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 in the RAM 223. The stored ball number is stored in the counter 223b.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S605, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S606), and data corresponding to the first special symbol is set in the least significant bit of the change order storage area 203i (S607). In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203i in the fluctuation execution determination process (S204) described above, the first entrance 64 serving as a lottery trigger for the special symbol 1 as in this control example, Even in the case where there are two types of the second entrances that are the lottery triggers for the special symbol 2, the variation can be started in the order of winning the entrances.

  When the process of S607 ends, a prefetch process (S620) is executed, and the process proceeds to S609. On the other hand, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S603: No), the processing of S604 to S607 and S620 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S609.

  In the processing of S609, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at any of the second entrances (second entrance 640 or right second entrance 640r) (S609). . When it is determined that the ball has won each second entrance (second entrance 640 or right second entrance 640r) (S609: Yes), for the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e, The same processing as when winning the first entrance 64 is performed.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S610), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) ( S611: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S612), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S613). Then, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S614), and the first area ( Data corresponding to special symbol 2 is set in the least significant bit (S615), prefetching processing is executed (S620), and this processing is terminated. Note that the determination of the first area in S615 is performed in the same manner as in S607.

  In the process of S609, there is no winning at each second entrance (second entrance 640 or right second entrance 640r) (S609: No), or each second entrance If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 even if there is a winning in the mouth (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) (S611: No) This process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 84, the prefetching process (S620) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S620). This pre-reading process (S620) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 83), is a process for determining in advance the lottery result of each special symbol and setting a winning information command based on the pre-determination result. .

  In the pre-reading process (S604), first, the determination result is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S606 or S614 of the start winning process described above (S621). In addition, the success / failure determination result determined here is determined in a case where it is a win in the normal gaming state. Since the variation time is varied and set depending on the number of holdings, the timing for starting the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to determine the exact gaming state at the start of the variation. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 having a common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state that the determination result can be accurately determined. Therefore, in the process of S621, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a win during the normal gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result in the process of S621 is a win (S622). When it is determined that the determination result is a win (S622: Yes), the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the start winning process described above. The lottery result is 1 (S623). Then, the process proceeds to S625.

  On the other hand, in the process of S622, if it is determined that the result of the determination is not successful (that is, it is out of place) (S622: No), the lottery result 1 is determined to be out (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. In the process of S625, the stop type is selected based on the stop type selection counter C3 and the lottery result 1 acquired in S606 of the start winning process or the S614, and the lottery result 2 is set (S625).

  Next, the variation pattern (variation time) is prefetched based on the variation type counter CS1 and the lottery result 2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the start winning process described above (S626). Then, a winning command is set based on the success / failure (lottery result 1), stop type (lottery result 2), and variation pattern look-ahead result (S627), and the process ends.

  Thus, in this control example, a game ball wins the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r), When a new hold is stored, the determination result is pre-determined (read-ahead) before the start of fluctuation based on the information stored (various counter values) and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the normal symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor accompanying the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S708). Specifically, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is shorter / hence, the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is zero, and If the probability variation flag 203h is off, the normal state of the normal symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S708 that the normal symbol is in a short time state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In this control example, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning slot 640 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing as much as possible that the ball intended to win the specific winning opening 65a enters the second winning slot 640. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 during the special symbol jackpot, A lot of balls enter the entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (big hit state), the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 becomes the upper limit (4).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time-short state (the value of the time-shortage counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability (see FIG. 66C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes), A display mode for winning is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S714), and if it is in a short time (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not a special symbol is being hit (S715). As a result of the determination in S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is out In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S715, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the entrance 640 is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol time is not short (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol of the normal symbol. When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time-short state (S719). If the time is short (S719: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds. (S720), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal symbol is in the normal state (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability (when the time is short), the time of the variable display is “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, which is much shorter than when the normal symbol has a low probability (when the normal state). Furthermore, since the opening period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It becomes.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “O” as the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S803) : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1010. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1010 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1010 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (see FIG. 89). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1010, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1010). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1011 and S1012) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1011 and S1012) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1011 and S1012) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1011 and S1012), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1011), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1012). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1013.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1004, the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1013. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1013, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1014), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 78) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) or the start winning process (see FIG. 83) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see FIG. 84) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 90) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). Then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 in the normal symbol variation process or the process of S717 are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by S407 or S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 81), S507 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 82), or S509. The variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  The first symbol display update process corresponds to the variation pattern set by S407, S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), S507 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82), or S509. When the fluctuation time is over, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, S406 and S408 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 81), the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 82), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set in S506 or S508.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) or the process of S721, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S713 or S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main process is executed. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 87 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack is initialized in the initial setting process (S1001). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 89). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1201). More specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) S219 is executed and the start of a special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached. In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the big hit start timing (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1215), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is not the big hit start timing (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S1202). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1202, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1202 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1202: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1203). In the process of S1203, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1203: Yes), the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1204), and the number of rounds indicating the number of newly started rounds A command is set (S1205). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1203: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. If (for example, 10) or more wins, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1207), End the process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1206: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1208). Specifically, when the special gaming state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1208, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1208: Yes), an ending command is set (S1209), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1208 (S1208: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot end timing (S1210). In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot end timing (S1210: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1210 that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1210: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot B (S1211). S1211: Yes), in order to shift to the short time state of the normal symbol after the big hit B is finished, the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is set to 100 (S1212), and the processing proceeds to S1214.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1211, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot B (that is, the jackpot A or C), in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot A or C, The probability variation flag 203h is set to ON (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214.

  In the process of S1214, the big hit medium flag 203k is set to OFF (S1214), and this process is terminated. With this jackpot control process (see FIG. 90), various settings related to the jackpot can be made.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91 to FIG. 109, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S2219 (see FIG. 93) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 93), it executes a power-off process in S2219. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2219 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S2219 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2219, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, if it is determined that the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and the power-off process of S2219. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2219 is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2219 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2219 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S2011), and time setting processing for setting reference time information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S2012). , Transition to main processing.

  Next, the time setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This time setting process (S2012) is a process for setting a reference time for determining whether or not a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour since power-on) has been reached. It is determined whether or not the time effect is executed (special back surface type is set) based on the reference time set in the time setting process (S2012).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S2012). In this time setting process (S2012), first, time information measured by the RTC 292 is acquired (S2101), and it is determined whether or not the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S2102).

  When it is determined that the time information acquired in the process of S2101 is within the time limit data (S2102: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S2103). Note that, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the time limit is set to three months.

  When the process of S2103 is completed, the time information acquired in the process of S2101 is set in the input time storage area 223h (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data (S2102: No), the processes of S2103 and S2104 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2105. That is, if it is outside the deadline data, the time information is not set in the entry time storage area 223h, so that the time effect is not executed regardless of the time zone. Thereby, since the rarity of the time effect can be increased, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 before the deadline. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 within the time limit (within 3 months) can be improved.

  In the process of S2105, 1 indicating the back A is set to the mode counter 223i (S2105), and this process ends. Thus, since the reference time (timekeeping information) for determining the type of the production period is stored in the input time storage area 223h of the RAM 223 by the start-up process, after that, from the difference between the reference time and the current time, It is possible to determine whether or not it is a time effect execution period.

  In addition, if the timing of turning on the power (that is, the start-up process is performed) is matched in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, the timing at which time information is stored in the insertion time storage area 223h of each pachinko machine 10. Can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223h matches, the timing determined as a specific time zone in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched, so the execution period of the time effect can be matched. . Thereby, the person concerned of a hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, an effect with a sense of unity can be displayed, so that the player's interest in games can be improved.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S2201 was executed (S2201). If not (S2201: No), the processing proceeds to S2212 without performing the processing of S2202 to S2211. In S2201, whether or not 1 msec has passed is determined mainly by S2202 to S2211 regarding display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2212, the variable display setting process of S2213, the special back surface setting process of S2214, and the prefetch effect selection process of S2215 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay. In addition, the process of S2214 is executed in a short cycle, so that the switching to the special back surface type can be performed without delay, and the process of S2215 is executed in a short cycle, so that a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) ) Can be set without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2215 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2202). ). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2209, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2210 ends, a rotation display operation setting process is executed (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process is a process for setting the rendering operation of the rotation unit 500. Details of the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2212, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S2212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2213 ends, a special back surface setting process is executed (S2214). This special back surface setting process is a process for determining whether or not to change to a back image for time effect based on the current time measured by the RTC 292. Details of the special back setting process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, prefetch effect selection processing is executed (S2215). This pre-reading effect selection process is a process for performing execution determination of a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects). Details of this prefetch effect selection processing (S2215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2215 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2216). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S2216: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2218), and the power interruption processing is executed. (S2219). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2220), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2216 (S2216: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2217), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2217: No), the process returns to S2201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2217: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2207) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S2207) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, monitoring of pressing on the frame button 22 is monitored. In this process, an effect corresponding to the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is set.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2207), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S2301). If it is determined in step S2301 that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2301: Yes), a pressing-time control process for performing control corresponding to the pressing is executed (S2302). Details of the pressing control process (S2302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the pressing control process ends, the process proceeds to S2304.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S2301: No), a press effect setting process for updating the mode of the press effect (normal press effect, special press effect). Is executed (S2303). Details of the press effect setting process (S2303) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the press effect setting process ends, the process proceeds to S2304.

  When the process of S2302 or S2303 is finished, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored, a touch sensor control process for performing corresponding control is executed (S2304), and this process is finished. Details of the touch sensor control process (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the pressing control process (S2302) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the pressing control process (S2302). This pressing control process (S2302) is a process for performing the corresponding control when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected as described above.

  In the pressing control process (S2302), first, it is determined whether or not the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is on (S2401). In the process of S2401, when it is determined that the back change prohibition flag 223u is off (that is, not on) (S2401: No), the back face type can be changed every time the player presses the frame button 22. It means that there is. Therefore, in this case, in order to change the rear surface type, first, the value of the mode counter 223i is updated (S2402). Specifically, as described above, the value is updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 3. For example, if the value before update is 1, the value is updated to 2, and if the value before update is 2, the value is updated to 3. If the value before update is 3, the value is updated to 1.

  When the processing of S2402 is completed, the back surface type corresponding to the updated value of the mode counter 223i is specified from the back surface switching table 222c (see FIG. 70B) (S2403), and the specified back surface type is displayed and controlled. A display rear image change command for notifying the device 114 is set (S2404), and this process is terminated. Based on this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 changes the rear image. Thus, since the back image can be changed every time the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, it can be changed to the favorite back type at the player's favorite timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display mode that matches the taste of each player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is on (S2401: Yes), whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j is greater than 0 (that is, normal pressing effect or special pressing) Whether or not an effect is being executed) is determined (S2405), and when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2405: No), this process ends. To do.

  In the processing of S2405, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S2405: Yes), it means that either the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is being executed. . Therefore, in this case, the pressing effect flag 223v is read, and the type of the pressing period (pressing effect) is specified (S2406). And it is discriminate | determined whether it is the pressing period (pressing period at the time of a continuous notice) of a special pressing effect (S2407), and when it determines that it is the pressing period of a special pressing effect (S2407: Yes), a special pressing effect A special notification sound setting process for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound in response to the middle press is executed (S2408), and this process is terminated. Details of the special notification sound setting process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2407 that the special pressing effect is not the pressing period (not the pressing period at the time of the continuous notice) (S2407: No), it means that it is the pressing period of the normal pressing effect. A process for determining the notice type of the effect is executed. Specifically, the notice type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is selected from the notice menu at the time of pressing notice 222b (see FIG. 70A) (S2409). Next, a display notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected notice type is set (S2410), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special notification sound setting process (S2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the special notification sound setting process (S2408). This special notification sound setting process (S2408) is executed in the press-down control process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, in response to the press of the frame button 22. This is a process for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound.

  In the special notification sound setting process (S2408), first, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag 223w is on (S2501). If the special notification flag 223w is off (S2501: No), the jackpot is dealt with. It is determined whether or not the change display is being performed (S2502). In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the change corresponding to the jackpot is being made (S2502: Yes), then a special notification execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set a special notification sound (S2503). Specifically, in the big hit variation, for example, it is determined that the winning is made in the special notification execution lottery at a rate of 20%. In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the battle for the special notification execution lottery is performed (S2503: Yes), the special notification in-progress flag 223w is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2506 for setting the special notification sound.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the special notification flag 223w is on (S2501: Yes), in the special notification sound setting processing before the previous time (see FIG. 96), the special notification execution lottery has already been won. This means that the special notification sound can be set in response to pressing of the frame button 22 until the special pressing period ends, so the processing from S2502 to S2504 is skipped and the special notification sound is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2506. In the process of S2506, a voice special notification sound command for instructing the voice output device 226 to output a special notification sound is set (S2506). The special notification sound command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process of the main process (see S2202 in FIG. 93). The voice output device 226 that has received the special notification sound command outputs a special notification sound. Thereby, before the result of the jackpot fluctuation being executed is notified, it is possible to make the player sense that the jackpot will be made by the special notification sound. Therefore, a sense of superiority can be given to the player.

  When the processing of S2506 is completed, the value of the pressing period timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S2507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2508). In the process of S2508, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to S2509.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, whether it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is not being executed (S2502: No), or in the processing of S2503, it is determined that the winning lottery is not performed in the special notification execution lottery ( In S2503: No), a failure effect in which no special notification sound is output is set (S2505), and the process proceeds to S2509. When this failure effect is set, for example, the button image (see FIG. 61) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 disappears and the word “sorry” is displayed on the screen. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that either the winning lottery in the special notification sound is not won or the current variation display is the variation display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, as a result of the variable display during execution, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display in the hope that the jackpot will be notified.

  In the process of S2509, the end of the special press effect is set (S2509). Thereafter, the back change prohibition flag 223u, the pressing effect flag 223v, and the special neglected flag 223w are set to OFF (S2510), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2508, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after the subtraction is 1 or more (not 0) (S2508: No), the processes of S2509 and S2510 are skipped, and this process ends.

  With this special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96), once the special notification sound execution lottery is won, the output of the special notification sound can be set repeatedly as long as the pressing period remains. Therefore, since the player can listen to the special notification sound as many times as desired by continuously pressing the frame button 22, the player can have a greater satisfaction. Also, the earlier the user presses the frame button 22, the more chances of listening to the special notification sound. Therefore, when the special press effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be actively operated (pressed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the special press effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a press effect setting process (S2303) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the press effect setting process (S2303). This press effect setting process (S2303) is executed when the press of the frame button 22 is not detected in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 94). As described above, the press effect (normal press effect, This is a process for updating the aspect of the special press effect.

  In this press effect setting process (S2303), it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the press effect (normal press effect, special press effect) (S2601). The start timing of the press effect is determined in advance for each variation display mode. Specifically, for example, in the normal pressing effect, one second after the occurrence of reach is determined as the start timing. In this control example, in the fluctuation display of the aspect in which the reach occurs, such as a hit super reach or a missed super reach, the occurrence of the reach is 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the variation display of the mode in which the normal pressing effect is executed, it is determined as the start timing of the normal pressing effect at the timing when the elapsed time from the start of the variation is 11 seconds (10 seconds + 1 second).

  In the process of S2601, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the press effect (S2601: Yes), an upper limit value corresponding to the current press effect is set as the value of the press period timer 223j (S2602). Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for a normal press effect, and a timer value for 3 seconds is set for a special press effect. Here, the reason that the special press effect is longer is set in order to increase the chance of the player to hear the special notification sound. As described above, in the first control example, when the special notification sound execution lottery is won in the special pressing effect, the special notification sound is pressed each time the frame button 22 is pressed until the special pressing effect effect period ends. Is configured to be settable. For this reason, if the production period is short, the production period expires before the player listens to the special notification sound a sufficient number of times (operates the frame button 22), causing the player to feel dissatisfied. There is a risk of it. On the other hand, in the first control example, the effect period of the special press effect is set to be longer (three times) than the effect period of the normal press effect. With this configuration, when execution of the special notification sound is determined, the player can press the sufficient number of times frame button 22 during the effect period of the special press effect. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  In the process of S2602, after the upper limit value is set in the pressing period timer 223j, the bit corresponding to the current pressing effect is set to ON in the pressing effect flag 223v (S2603), and the back change prohibition flag 223u is turned ON. (S2604), and this process ends. As described above, in the pressing effect flag 223v, the upper bit corresponds to the normal pressing effect and the lower bit corresponds to the special pressing effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2601 that it is not the start timing of the press effect (S2601: No), whether or not the value of the press period timer 223j is greater than 0 (whether or not the press effect stage remains). Is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (the effect period of the pressing effect remains) (S2605: Yes), the value of the pressing period timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S2606), It is determined whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2607).

  In the processing of S2607, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2607: Yes), the end of the pressing effect is set (S2608). Thereafter, the back change prohibition flag 223u and all the bits of the pressing effect flag 223v are set to OFF (S2609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2605: No), the value of the pressing period timer 223j after the subtraction is processed in S2607. Is determined to be greater than or equal to 1 (not 0) (S2607: No), the process is terminated.

  By this pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 97), the value of the pressing period timer 223j can be updated, and the start and end of the pressing effect can be suitably set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the touch sensor control process (S2304) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control process (S2304). This touch sensor control process (S2304) is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 94). As described above, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored and a touch operation is performed. This is a process for executing the corresponding control.

  In the touch sensor control process (S2304), first, it is determined whether or not the touch effect is being executed (S2701). Here, the touch effect is an aspect of an entertaining effect that is executed during variable display, and is an effect that encourages the player to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the touch effect is not being executed (S2701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that it is during the execution period of the touch effect (S2701: Yes), the effective time of the touch effect stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o is subtracted (S2702), It is determined whether or not the output of the touch sensor 290 is turned on (S2703).

  In the process of S2703, when it is determined that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on (S2703: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2704). Next, 1 is added to the value of the level storage area 223k (S2705), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after the addition is set (S2706). When the value stored in the level storage area 223k has reached the upper limit value set corresponding to the touch effect being executed, the value of the level storage area 223k is updated or the command is set. Not done. When the process of S2706 ends, the value of the interval counter 223p is reset (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2712.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the output of the touch sensor 290 is OFF (S2703: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223p (S2708), and the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not there is (S2709). In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value (S2709: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the level storage area 223k (S2710). Then, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after subtraction is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is not the upper limit value (S2709: No), the processes of S2710 and S2711 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, it is determined whether or not the effective time of the touch effect has been updated to 0 by the process of S2702 (S2712). In the process of S2712, when it is determined that the effective time of the touch effect is 0 (S2712: Yes), the notification effect of the aspect corresponding to the value of the level storage area 223k is set (S2713), and the touch effect ends. After setting (S2714), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2712 that the effective time of the touch effect is not 0 (S2712: No), the processes of S2713 and S2714 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process (S2211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting the rendering operation of the rotation unit 500 as described above.

  In the rotation display operation setting process (S2211), it is first determined whether it is the start timing of the rotation display effect (S2801). Here, there is a possibility that the rotation display effect is executed with a part of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, for example, the execution is started 5 seconds before the change stop. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the rotation display effect (5 seconds before the change stop of the change display with the rotation display effect) (S2801: Yes), the rotation display device is rotated. The start is set (S2802). Here, for the driver IC that controls the drive motor 457, a rotation speed of one rotation per 0.1 second is set. Then, the rotation display effect flag 223ab is set to ON to indicate that the rotation display effect is being executed (S2803), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of the rotation display effect in the process of S2801 (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on (S2804). When it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is off (that is, not on) (S2804: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2804 that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on (S2804: Yes), this means that the rotation display effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2805). In the process of S2805, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: Yes), the end of the rotation display effect is set (S2806), the value of the rotation counter 223aa, the rotation display effect flag 223ab, and All the lighting set flags 223ac are reset (S2807), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2805 that it is not the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: No), it is then determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223ac is on (S2808). In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is ON (S2808: Yes), lighting for updating the lighting pattern of each LED1-40 according to the progress (rotation position) of the rotation operation A setting update process is executed (S2809), and this process ends. Details of the lighting setting update processing (S2809) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is off (that is, not on) (S2808: No), the first lighting setting (light emission pattern) is started after the rotation operation of the rotating unit 500 is started. ) Means unset, next, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is on (S2810). In this control example, the setting of the light emission pattern is started after the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is sufficiently stabilized. Specifically, after the rotation unit 500 has made 10 revolutions, the setting of the light emission pattern is started.

  In the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2810: No), the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is a halfway position, and the setting of the light emission pattern is started. Since this cannot be done, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2811), and the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is It is determined whether or not 10 (S2812). That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation unit 500 has made 10 revolutions after the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. In the process of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is not 10 (S2812: No), there is a possibility that the rotation speed is not stable, and the setting of the light emission pattern should not be started. Then, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is 10 (S2812: Yes), a sufficient number of rotations (10 laps) after the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. Since the rotation speed is stable, the lighting pattern setting based on the operation scenario table 222f is started. Specifically, first, the operation pointer 223ae is reset (S2813). Then, the light emission pattern of the rotation unit 500 corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2814). This process is terminated.

  By this rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), the rotation display effect can be appropriately executed.

  Next, the lighting setting update process (S2809) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update process (S2809). This lighting setting update process (S2809) is executed in the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), and, as described above, each LED 1 to 1 according to the progress of the rotation operation (rotation position) of the rotation unit 500. This is a process for updating 40 lighting patterns.

  In this lighting setting update process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is on (S2901). In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2901: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation number counter 223aa (S2902), and the value of the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae Is reset (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set in each LED 1 to 40 (S2904), and this process is terminated. To do. Each time the origin sensor of the rotation unit 500 is turned on, the operation pointer 223ae is reset and the light emission pattern is reset from the top of the operation scenario table 222f. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the timing of light emission and extinction of the LED.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2901: No), the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and the value of the step counter 223ad are obtained. Reading (S2905), it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223ad is a value corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906). When it is determined that the value of the step counter 223ad is a value corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2906 that the value of the step counter 223ad is not a value corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223ae (S2906: No), 1 is added to the value of the action pointer 223ae (S2907). The light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223ae is read from the action scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2908), and this process ends.

  By executing this lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100), it is possible to appropriately control the lighting and extinguishing of the respective LEDs 1 to 40 in accordance with the progress of the rotation operation, so the “win” shown in FIG. The afterimage of the character can be perceived by the player.

  Next, a command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main controller 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S3001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3003), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in order to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S3001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3004). When the stop type command is received (S3004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3006). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that a stop type command has not been received (S3004: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserve ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3007). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S3007: Yes), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command is displayed. Then, the value included in the received number-of-holding-balls command is stored (S3008), and this process is terminated. Specifically, if the currently-held reserved ball number command is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is determined from the received reserved ball number command. The value (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the currently received reserved ball number command is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is determined from the received reserved ball number command (special The variable display hold count N2) in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in the process of S3008, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A display hold ball number command is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, an accurate number of reserved symbols is always displayed in the hold display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3007, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S3007: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3009). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S3009: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S3010), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the winning command reception process (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S3010).

  In the winning command reception process, firstly, winning information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3101). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is currently set to ON (eight hold effects are being executed) (S3102), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (eight hold effects). (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is on (S3103).

  In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the split display flag 223s is off (that is, not on) (S3103: No), the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)) Based on, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect) can be executed for the new winning information (S3104). If execution of the continuous notice effect (8-hold effect) is determined in this determination, the hold symbol corresponding to the new winning information and the hold symbol that is the target of the 8-hold effect are divided and displayed (see FIG. 63). ), And the continuous notice effect is extended to the reserved symbols for the new winning information.

  When the processing of S3104 is completed, it is determined whether or not continuous notice is executed for new winning information (S3105). When it is determined that the continuous advance notice is not executed for the new winning information (S3105: No), the special symbol reserved ball counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c) A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the total value is overwritten in the remaining notice counter 223r (S3106).

  Next, the split display flag 223s is set to ON (S3107). Then, the divided display of the sub display area Ds is set according to the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3105 that continuous advance notice is executed for new winning information (S3105: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c The total value is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3109), and this process is terminated. In other words, in addition to the reserved symbol displayed at the start of the continuous notice effect (8-hold effect), the continuous notice effect is set to be extended for the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue the continuous notice effect over a longer variation display, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit for a longer time. In addition, for a new winning, a configuration in which execution (extension) of the continuous notice effect is determined under the same conditions as when the continuous notice effect (eight-hold effect) is started, so that winning information with low expectation ( For example, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being extended with respect to the completely out of stop type). Therefore, it is possible to give a higher expectation to the player who has recognized that the continuous notice effect (8-holding effect) has been set (extended) for the new winning information during the continuous notice effect. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3102 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, the continuous notice effect is not being executed) (S3102: No), the divided display flag 223s is turned on in the process of S3103. If it is determined that the divided display has already been set (S3103: Yes), this process is terminated.

  By executing this winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), when a new start winning is detected during the execution of the eight hold effects, the divided display can be set. Thereby, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the eight-holding effect will continue when a new start prize is detected.

  In the first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) for the new winning information. It was set as the structure which does not judge. That is, it is configured to determine whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect for the new winning information only when the entire sub display area Ds is the back of the school of fish. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . It may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect for new winning information even after the fish back and bubble back are displayed separately. In other words, in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 is deleted, and if the continuous notice flag 223q is turned on in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. Good. If it is determined in the process of S3104 that the continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub display area Ds is displayed on the rear surface of the fish school even when the divided display is set. It is good also as a structure which returns to an aspect. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous notice effect has been extended for new winning information. Further, when a new start winning is detected in a state where the split display is set, and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the acquired new winning information, the split display is maintained. The display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the fish school. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to recognize more clearly the holding | maintenance symbol corresponding to a holding ball with high expectation.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8-hold effect) for the new winning information during the continuous notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)), a table that is referred to when a continuous notice effect is newly started, and a reference that is detected when a new start prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. A table may be provided separately and the probabilities may be different. In this case, the determination of whether or not to set the continuous notice effect for the new winning information during execution of the continuous notice effect may set the winning probability higher. With this configuration, once the continuous notice effect is started, it becomes easy to set the continuous notice effect for new winning information, so the continuous notice effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It becomes easy. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation for the jackpot for a longer period of time.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3009, if it is determined that a winning command has not been received (S3009: No), it is then determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3011). If a stop command is received (S3011: Yes), a stop command reception process for performing control corresponding to the stop command is executed (S3012), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the stop command reception process (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process (S3012). In the stop command reception process, first, the change stop of the change display in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3201). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3202). If it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (S3202: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice counter 223r is 0 (S3203). In S3203, when it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (not 0) (S3203: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S3203 that the value of the remaining notice counter 223r is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol stop display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S3204). . If it is determined in S3204 that the stop display is set not for the jackpot symbol (S3204: No), a display continuous notice command indicating the end of the continuous notice is set (S3205), and the process proceeds to S3206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3204 that the jackpot symbol stop display has been set (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3206. In the process of S3206, the continuous notice flag 223q and the split display flag 223s are set to OFF (S3206), and this process ends.

  By executing this stop command reception process, the notice effect can be appropriately terminated when the continuous notice effect (eight-hold effect) ends due to losing.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S3011 that a stop command has not been received (S3011: No), it is then determined whether a command related to jackpot is received from the main controller 110 (S3013). And when it determines with having received the command related to jackpot (S3013: Yes), a jackpot related command process is performed (S3014) and it returns to a main process.

  Here, the jackpot related command processing (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3014). In the jackpot related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), an opening command for display for executing the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3302), and this process is terminated. To do. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that an opening command has not been received (S3301: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3303). When the round number command is received (S3303: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3304), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S3305), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3306). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), a display ending command is set (S3307), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3306 that an ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S3013 that a jackpot related command has not been received (S3013: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S3015), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By this processing, it is possible to set commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 based on commands output from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2213). This variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S3405. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3402), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S3003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3403).

  Then, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern selection process for selecting a detailed mode of variation display is executed (S3404). Details of the variation pattern selection process (S3404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the variation pattern selection process is executed, the process proceeds to S3405.

  In the process of S3405, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3405). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3405: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this variation display setting. End the process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3406), and then in the process of S3006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3407).

  Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3408), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S3404) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S3404). This variation pattern selection processing (S3404) is processing for selecting a detailed variation display mode based on the rough variation pattern notified from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command.

  In the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106), first, the value of the sub variation selection counter 223t is acquired (S3501). Next, the sub variation pattern selection table 222a is read (S3502), and the extracted variation pattern and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the sub variation selection counter 223t are selected from the read sub variation pattern selection table 222a (S3503).

  When the process of S3503 is completed, a rotation display execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect is executed from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect (S3504). Details of the rotation display execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the rotation display execution determination process ends, the process proceeds to S3505.

  In the process of S3505, based on the fluctuation pattern type selected in the process of S3503, a command for generating a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is generated. The transmission ring buffer is set (S3505). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3506). In the process of S3506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the processing of S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is greater than 0 (S3507). If it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S3507: Yes), the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is decremented by 1 (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining notice counter 223r is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3509.

  In the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is on (S3509). When it is determined that the divided display flag 223s is on (S3509: Yes), a display continuous notice command for notifying divided display according to the value of the updated remaining notice number counter 223r is set (S3510). End the process. Thereby, the display mode of the sub display area Ds in which the divided display (see FIG. 63) is set can be appropriately updated in accordance with the number of reserved symbols. On the other hand, in the process of S3509, when it is determined that the split display flag 223s is off (S3509: No), this process ends.

  Next, the rotation display execution determination process (S3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the rotation display execution determination process (S3504). This rotation display execution determination process (S3504) is a process for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect as described above.

  When the rotation display execution determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) is an aspect accompanied by a rotation display effect (S3601). In S3601, when the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is not an aspect accompanied by a rotation display effect (S3601: No), it is not necessary to determine the upper limit number of times, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, in S3601, when the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is an aspect accompanied by a rotation display effect (S3601: Yes), the current time is read from the RTC 292 (S3602), and the upper limit number corresponding to the read current time is set. It is read from the production upper limit count table 222g (see FIG. 72) (S3603), and it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation display count counter 223x matches the read upper limit count (S3604). In S3604, when it is determined that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x does not match the upper limit number (S3604: No), it means that the number of executions of the rotation display effect has not reached the upper limit number. The execution of the rotation display effect is set as it is (S3605). Next, 1 is added to the value of the rotation display number counter 223x (S3606), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3604 that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the upper limit number (S3604: Yes), it means that the number of executions of the rotation display effect has already reached the upper limit number. Execution of the winning touch effect is set as an alternative effect of the rotation display effect (S3607), and this process ends.

  With this rotation display execution determination process (see FIG. 107), the number of executions of the rotation display effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates can be limited to a predetermined upper limit value or less for each time period. Here, since the rotation unit 500 includes a substrate member 531 having a plurality of LEDs 532 mounted therein, when an effect using the rotation unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. Generate heat. For this reason, if the rotary unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor to the substrate melts due to heat generation, which may lead to poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, an upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 corresponding to the elapsed time (time period) is defined for each time period. And when the production | presentation aspect accompanied by operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 is selected in the state which reached | attained the upper limit, it is set as the structure replaced with the alternative production which the rotation unit 500 does not operate | move. Thereby, since the frequency | count of operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, failures, such as a contact failure, can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the special back surface setting process (S2214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special back setting process (S2214). This special back surface setting process (S2214) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and sets the time effect based on the time information timed by the RTC 292. This is a process for determining whether or not.

  In the special back setting process (S2214), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S3701). If the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S3701: No), the time effect is set. Since there is no possibility that the time effect is being executed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S3701: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S3702), and the acquired time data is switched to the special back (time It is determined whether the data corresponds to the (execution of performance) timing (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, when it is determined that the acquired time data is data corresponding to the switching timing to the special back surface (S3703: Yes), the value of the special mode counter 223m is updated (S3704). The special back surface type corresponding to the value of the special mode counter 223m is specified from the special back surface switching table 222d (see FIG. 71A) (S3705). Then, a display rear image change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified special back surface type is set (S3706), the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to on (S3707), and this The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S3702 is not the switching timing to the special back surface (S3703: No), is the acquired time data the data indicating the end timing of the special back surface? It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the process of S3708, when it is determined that it is not the special back surface end timing (S3708: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3708, when it is determined that it is the end time of the special back surface (S3708: Yes), the back surface type corresponding to the value of the mode counter 223i is specified from the back surface switching table 222c (see FIG. 70B). Then, a display back surface change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified back surface type is set (S3709). Next, the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF (S3710), and this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, the prefetch effect selection process (S2215) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing prefetch effect selection processing (S2215). This pre-reading effect selection process (S2215) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the pre-reading result of each reserved ball (8 pieces) This is a process for determining whether or not the “holding effect” can be executed.

  In the prefetch effect selection process (S2215), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3801). If it is determined in the process of S3801 that the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3801: Yes), the process immediately ends because the continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) is already being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, not on) (S3801: No), the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol number 223b) It is determined whether or not the total value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8 (S3802).

  In the process of S3802, when it is determined that the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8, (S3802: Yes) ), It is determined whether or not the change display of the third symbol is being executed and one second before the change stop (S3803). In the process of S3803, when it is determined that it is one second before the change stop (S3803: Yes), each hold is based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)). It is determined whether continuous notice can be executed for the ball (S3804).

  In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the continuous notice is to be executed in the determination for any of the held balls (S3805: Yes), the continuous notice effect is started for the eight held balls currently held. A display continuous notice command for notification to the display control device 114 is set (S3806). Then, 8 is set to the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3807), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (S3808). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3802, the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is not 8 (that is, 7 or less). (S3802: No), in the process of S3803, when it is determined that it is not one second before the change stop (S3803: No), and in the process of S3805, continuous notice is given in the execution determination for all the holding balls. If it is determined not to execute (S3805: No), the process is terminated without setting the start of the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect).

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 123. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 110), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 110. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 121A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 121A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112B) and the simple display setting process so that the power-on image is drawn. (Refer to S6309 in FIG. 112B) is executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while displayed on the display device 81, the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r). ) Is entered (start prize), and when a change production start instruction is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power is turned on. A change image can be displayed immediately during the change effect period, and a simple change effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 112B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 77) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 77 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table corresponding to “off” and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117, the details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a). FIG. 114A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. It is read from (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114A), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the process of S6501. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6502 is displayed. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the above process, and the image data of the necessary sprite in the set fluctuation display data table is Character ROM2 in advance From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete release) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a command opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from an opening effect table storage area (not shown) in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6702. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Also, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds or 2 rounds). Therefore, after the display ending command is received, the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 until the ending effect starts after the round effect ends. Many waiting times occur, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, which may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Absent. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether there is a display ending command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an ending command (S6410: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used as the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. It is read from (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display ending command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display pending ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is a display holding ball number command (S6412: Yes), the holding ball number command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116A, details of the reserved ball number command process (S6413) will be described. FIG. 116 (a) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number flag 233m is set to ON (S7001). Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved ball number command for display (S7002), the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated based on the extracted reserved ball number (S7003), and this reserved ball number command processing is ended. The process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display pending ball number command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a display continuous notice command (S6414: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116B, details of the continuous notice command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing. This continuous notice command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the continuous notice command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous notice command processing, first, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to ON (S7101). Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubbles is extracted from the continuous notice command for display (S7102). Next, the continuous notice information storage area 233p is updated based on the extracted distribution (S7103), the continuous notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no display continuous notice command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is an image change command (S6416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7201). Thereby, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121). And among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C and special back surfaces A to C corresponding to time effects), it corresponds to the back image type indicated by the back image change command. The back image discrimination flag 233x is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7202), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121), when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7201 is turned on, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7202 The rear image type after change is specified. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that when the rear image type after the change is the rear A, all image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore no image transfer is performed.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back A to C and the special back A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7202, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the back image of the back image is specified. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more back image change commands are not stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in step S6416 that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If this is the case (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag 233q indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7301). Then, among the error determination flags 233r provided for each error type, the error determination flag 233r corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags 233r are set to OFF (S7302). Then, the error command process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7302 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags 233r corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the processing of S7302. . As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S6418 (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, the details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 118, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7401). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S7402 and S7403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7404. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7402). Various image setting processes for setting an image corresponding to the command are executed (S7403).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 119, details of various image setting processing (S7403) will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing various image setting processes (S7403).

  In the various image setting processes (S7403), first, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number flag 233m is on (S7501). If the new reserved ball number flag 233m is on (S7501: Yes), the reserved symbol is determined. The number of reserved symbol data corresponding to the value of the number counter 233n is expanded (S7502). Then, the new reserved ball number flag 233m is set to OFF (S7503), and the process proceeds to S7504. On the other hand, if the new reserved ball number flag 233m is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), the processing of S7502 and S7503 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7504.

  In the process of S7504, it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag 233o is on (S7504). If the new continuous notice command flag 233o is on (S7504: Yes), data in the continuous notice information storage area 233p is determined. The notice image data of the distribution (distribution between the back of the fish school and the back of the bubble) corresponding to is developed (S7505). Then, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to OFF (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507. On the other hand, if the new continuous notice command flag 233o is not on, that is, is off (S7504: No), the processing of S7505 and S7506 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7507.

  In the process of S7507, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507). If the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507: Yes), the warning image data is developed based on the error determination flag 233r. (S7508). Then, the error occurrence flag 233q is set to OFF (S7509), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag 233q is not on, that is, if it is off (S7507: No), the process of S7508 and S7509 is skipped and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the various image setting processes (S7403) are completed, or when it is determined that the new command flag is OFF in the process of S7401 (S7401: No), the pointer update process is then executed (S7404).

  Details of the pointer update process (S7404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7404). This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7601). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7601, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7602). As a result, if it is End information (S7602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7603), and if it is a demo display data table (S7603: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7605), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7606). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7602: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7405). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S7405 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7406), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7407). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7407: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S7407: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7408).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7408: No), the final display effect has not yet been performed and the final display effect has been performed. The process of S7414 is executed. In the process of S7409, the fixed display data table is read from the fixed display effect table storage area in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7409), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the content is cleared (S7410). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7411).

  When the processing of S7411 ends, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7412). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7413), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7414), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7414 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the stop pattern of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop pattern determination flag set by the process of S7414. Then, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7408, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7408: Yes), the process of S7415 to S7420 is executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7415, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7415). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7415: No), the demonstration display data table is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7416), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The contents are cleared (S7417). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7418).

  When the processing of S7418 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7419), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7420), this processing is terminated, and V Return to processing.

  As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fixed display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 121A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is executed (S7702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7701, that is, if it is off (S7701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7802). In the process of S7802, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7802 that the transfer process has not ended (S7802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7802: Yes), the process proceeds to S7803. Also, as a result of the process of S7801, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7801: No), the process proceeds to S7803.

  In the process of S7803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7803: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S7804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  On the other hand, if all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S7803 (S7803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7805), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 112B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) (see S7701: No in FIG. 121A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7703), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7404) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7902). If it is transfer data information (S7902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In addition, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7904), and the process proceeds to S7905.

  In the process of S7902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7902: No), the processes of S7903 and S7904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7905. In the process of S7905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7906).

  In the process of S7906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S7906 (S7906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7906: Yes), the process proceeds to S7907. Also, as a result of the process of S7905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7905: No), the process proceeds to S7907.

  In the process of S7907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7907). If the transfer start flag is on (S7907: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7907: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7909). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7910), it is provided for each back image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7912), and the process proceeds to S7913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S7911, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S7913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7913 (S7913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7913 (S7913: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S7915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 77 is generated (S8001). That is, in the process of S8001, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S8002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S8002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S8003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 112B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit (4), eight reserved balls A continuous notice effect that sets a special notice effect over the variable display is configured to be executable. The eight hold effects are configured such that execution becomes easier to be determined as a lottery result with high expectation is held in the hold ball. Therefore, when eight hold effects are executed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that there is a big hit in the hold.

  Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is detected during execution of the eight-holding effect and the number of held balls increases, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball that is the target of the eight-holding effect. And a reserved symbol corresponding to a new reserved ball are displayed (divided and displayed) in a manner that the player can easily distinguish. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the eight-holding effect is finished, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to a display mode dedicated to the eight-holding effect, the eight-holding effect is set. When only the holding ball corresponding to the new start winning detected in the state remains, even though the holding symbol remains, the action as if the eight holding effects suddenly ended It may become. That is, there is a possibility of giving an impression as if the eight on-hold effects were ended in the middle, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing divided display, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how long the eight-holding effect will continue when a new start prize is detected. This can prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-holding effect.

  Further, in the first control example, a rotation display effect in which a specific character is displayed by the rotation unit 500 configured by a versatile writer can be executed. In this rotation display effect, by switching the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the rotation unit 500 according to the progress of the rotation operation, a specific character (for example, “winning”) in the locus of light emitted by each LED is displayed. ) Is perceived by the player as an afterimage. Thereby, a novel effect different from the display effect by a general display device can be provided.

  Here, since the rotation unit 500 includes a substrate member 531 having a plurality of LEDs 532 mounted therein, when an effect using the rotation unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. Generate heat. For this reason, if the rotary unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor to the substrate melts due to heat generation, which may lead to poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, an upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 corresponding to the elapsed time (time period) is defined for each time period. And when the production | presentation aspect accompanied by operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 is selected in the state which reached | attained the upper limit, it is set as the structure replaced with the alternative production which the rotation unit 500 does not operate | move. Thereby, since the frequency | count of operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, failures, such as a contact failure, can be prevented (suppressed). In this control example, the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the rotation operation range of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other. Therefore, the touch effect can be executed only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 has reached the upper limit number so that the operation of the rotation unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not compete with each other. It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the touch effect and the rotation display effect from occurring at the same time and causing the player to be confused.

  In the first control example, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is increased twice every three hours, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a rotation display effect can be performed until it reaches | attains the upper limit frequency | count (for example, 10 times) per day irrespective of a time slot | zone. By configuring in this way, the possibility that the rotation display effect is executed can be increased as the game is played from an earlier time zone, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of opening the hall can be improved. it can.

  In the first control example, when the execution of the rotation display effect is canceled in order to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed simultaneously (the number of executions of the rotation display effect reaches the upper limit number of times). The touch effect is executed only as an alternative effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to first determine whether or not to set a touch effect, and to select a rotation display effect only when the touch effect is not set. Further, it is not necessary to take a configuration for performing a two-stage discrimination. In the sub variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation display mode in which only the rotation display effect is set and the variation display mode in which only the touch effect is set are separately defined in association with values of different sub variation selection counters 223t. It is good also as a structure to keep. Also, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a variable display mode in which both the effects are executed within the variable display of 1 by shifting the execution period of the touch effect and the rotation display effect. Also good. Even when these modifications are made, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed simultaneously. Therefore, when the player tries to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the touch effect, the rotating unit 500 that is rotating is touched, and the rotating unit 500 is damaged or the player is injured. This can be prevented (suppressed). Further, the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 can prevent the player from touching the display screen, and can prevent the player from being stressed that he / she cannot participate in the touch effect satisfactorily.

  In the first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) for the new winning information. It was set as the structure which is not performed. That is, it is configured to determine whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect for the new winning information only when the entire sub display area Ds is the back of the school of fish. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . It may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect for new winning information even after the fish back and bubble back are displayed separately. In other words, in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 is deleted, and if the continuous notice flag 223q is turned on in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. Good. If it is determined in the process of S3104 that the continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub display area Ds is displayed on the rear surface of the fish school even when the divided display is set. It is good also as a structure which returns to an aspect. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous notice effect has been extended for new winning information. Further, when a new start winning is detected in a state where the split display is set, and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the acquired new winning information, the split display is maintained. The display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the fish school. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to recognize more clearly the holding | maintenance symbol corresponding to a holding ball with high expectation.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8-hold effect) for the new winning information during the continuous notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)), a table that is referred to when a continuous notice effect is newly started, and a reference that is detected when a new start prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. A table may be provided separately and the probabilities may be different. In this case, the determination of whether or not to set the continuous notice effect for the new winning information during execution of the continuous notice effect may set the winning probability higher. With this configuration, once the continuous notice effect is started, it becomes easy to set the continuous notice effect for new winning information, so the continuous notice effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It becomes easy. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation for the jackpot for a longer period of time.

  In the first control example, the display mode of the sub display area Ds in which the reserved symbols are displayed is changed to the mode in which the image of the fish school is displayed on the back as the continuous notice effect (eight hold effect). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the reserved symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect is changed as long as the effect of the same system is set continuously over 8 (plural) variable displays. May be. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the reserved symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect. In addition, instead of or in addition to changing the back side of the sub display area Ds or the display mode of the reserved symbol, the display mode of the variable display of the third symbol in which the continuous notice effect is set is changed to a special mode. It is good also as composition to do. Specifically, a specific character that does not appear (or is difficult to appear) in the variable display executed in a state where the continuous notice effect is not set may be displayed. It is good also as a structure which changes to the display mode only for production | presentation, and it is good also as a structure which changes a back surface image into the back view type | species dedicated to continuous notice production. Further, the combination of stop symbols at the time of detachment may be configured to be a special combination of stop symbols (so-called chance eyes).

  In the present first control example, a configuration for determining whether or not to newly execute a continuous notice effect (eight-holding effect) regardless of the number of the holding ball with a high expectation degree. However, it is not limited to this. It may be configured such that as the lottery result with high expectation is held on a new holding ball in time, the eight holding effects are more easily executed. By configuring in this way, when the continuous notice effect is started, the expectation that the second half of the holding ball is a big hit can be increased, so the player is expected to end the continuous notice effect. A feeling can be maintained.

  In the first control example, only two settings of turning on and off are provided as the settings of the red, blue, and green LEDs in the LEDs 1 to 40. That is, in the setting of each LED 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f, if the bit corresponding to each color is 1 (on), the LED of that color is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED of that color is turned on. Although simple control to turn off was performed, it is not limited to this. For example, the setting of each color LED may be made finer. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of levels of light emission states from the time of extinction to the time of full lighting. In other words, by configuring the LED current value of each color LED in a plurality of levels (for example, 16 levels), the brightness of each color may be adjusted so that gradation can be expressed. The operation scenario table 222f is configured to represent data corresponding to the lighting state of each color in the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits if there are 16 stages), and a rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99). In the case of newly setting a light emission pattern, the LED current value of each color may be updated from the read bit data. With this configuration, red, green, blue, yellow (red + green), purple (red + blue), light blue (green + blue), white (red + red) that can be expressed by a combination of red, green, and blue In addition to green + blue) and black (all lights off), various colors can be realized. Specifically, gray can be expressed as a color by lighting each of red, green, and blue with a current value corresponding to half the luminance when all the lights are on. In addition, it is possible to express orange as a color by turning on all red (lights at the maximum current value), turning on green at a current value corresponding to half the brightness of all lights, and turning off blue. it can.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. In the first control example described above, each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is configured as a set of three colors of red, green, and blue, and can be independently controlled to turn on and off the LEDs of each color. It was configured to be able to express multiple colors.

  On the other hand, in the modification of the first control example, monochromatic LEDs are employed as the LEDs 1 to 40, respectively. Specifically, each of the LEDs 1 to 20 was replaced with a single red LED, and each of the LEDs 21 to 40 was replaced with a single blue LED. Thereby, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced and the cost rate can be reduced.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of the configuration in that the LEDs 1 to 20 are replaced with single red LEDs, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are replaced. Each replaced with a single blue LED, a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 Is a change. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the structure of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in the present modification, among the 40 LEDs 532 provided in the rotating unit 500, LED1 to LED20 are configured as red LEDs, and LED21 to LED40 are configured as blue LEDs. . In this control example, only the LEDs 1 to 20 composed of red LEDs are turned on as rotation display effects, so that only the red characters that cause red characters to be displayed as afterimages and the LEDs 21 to 40 composed of blue LEDs are displayed. There is provided a blue character effect in which a blue character is displayed as an afterimage by being lit. In addition, the red character effect is easily selected with a variation pattern of probability variation jackpot (big hit A, C), and the blue character effect is easily selected with a variation pattern of normal jackpot (big hit B). With this configuration, when the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the lighting color.

  In addition, in the present modification, a purple character effect that can be selected only with a variation pattern of jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player is configured to be executable. This purple character effect will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). FIG. 124 (b) is a diagram showing an afterimage mode during the execution of the purple character effect. When the purple character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the red LED and the blue LED arranged at the target position of each red LED perform the same lighting operation at the same rotational position. Thereby, the afterimage drawn by the red light emitted by the red LED and the afterimage drawn by the blue light emitted by the blue LED are alternately viewed at a minute time interval. In this case, it is difficult for the human eye to distinguish between red and blue characters, and as a result, the red and blue characters are superimposed due to the integral effect of the human eye. , It is perceived as if the afterimage is displayed in purple characters.

  Thus, in this modification, it is comprised so that a 3-color character can be expressed only using 2-color LED. Thereby, since the number of parts of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, it is possible to maximize the production effect while reducing the weight and reducing the cost rate.

<Electric Configuration in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 125, the RAM 223 in the present modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 73) in that a scenario storage area 223af is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

  The scenario storage area 223af is a storage area for storing an operation scenario corresponding to each of a red character effect, a blue character effect, and a purple character effect. In the modification of the first control example, only the operation scenario for the red character effect is defined for the operation scenario table 222f. That is, only the light emission patterns for the LEDs 1 to 20 are defined, and the light emission patterns of the LEDs 21 to 40 are not defined. For this reason, when the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is applied as it is, only the red character effect can be executed. Therefore, in this modification, the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is converted into a format corresponding to each effect and stored in the scenario storage area 223af, and is based on the operation scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The light emission pattern is set. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the single operation scenario table 222f.

  When the blue character effect is executed, data obtained by inverting the correspondence relationship between the LED of the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f and the light emission pattern is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. That is, the light emission pattern of LED1 is converted to the light emission pattern of LED40, the light emission pattern of LED2 is converted to LED2, and each light emission pattern up to LED21 is inverted and stored in the scenario storage area 223af. Thereby, the blue character effect can be realized by simple control. When the purple character effect is executed, the scenario storage area 223af is updated by inverting the correspondence relationship between the LED of the operation scenario and the light emission pattern every time the rotation unit 500 makes one turn. Thereby, a purple character effect can also be realized by simple control.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. First, with reference to FIG. 126, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification will be described.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification. Of the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, the processes of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 are respectively the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99) in the first control example. The same processes as those of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 are executed.

  Further, in the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, when it is determined in the process of S2808 that the lighting set flag 223ac is on (S2808: Yes), the first control Instead of the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100) in the example, the lighting setting update process 2 is executed (S2821), and this process ends. Details of the lighting setting update processing 2 (S2821) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2810 that the output of the origin sensor is ON (S2810: Yes), a lighting start process for setting the start of the light emission pattern is executed (S2822), and this process ends. . Details of the lighting start process (S2822) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing lighting setting update processing 2 (S2821). In the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821), the lighting patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 are updated according to the progress (rotation position) of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, similarly to the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100). Process.

  Among the lighting setting update processing 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, the lighting setting update processing in the first control example (see FIG. 100) is performed in each process of S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907. The same processes as S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907 are executed.

  In the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, when the process of S2902 ends, it is next determined whether or not the current rotation display effect is a purple character effect ( If it is a purple character effect (S2911: Yes), a scenario is generated by inverting the correspondence between the LED of the operation scenario currently stored in the scenario storage area 223af and the light emission pattern, and the scenario storage area 223af Is overwritten (S2912), and the process proceeds to S2903. Since the processing of S2911 is executed every time the rotation unit 500 makes one round and returns to the origin position, when the purple character effect is set, the light emission pattern for the red LED is made every time the rotation unit 500 makes one turn. And the light emission pattern for the blue LED can be set alternately. Accordingly, afterimages drawn by red light and afterimages drawn by blue light are alternately perceived at minute time intervals, red and blue can be combined and made purple perceived by the integration effect. Therefore, afterimages of different colors can be expressed using only the red LED and the blue LED.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2911, when it is determined that the current rotation display effect is not a purple character effect (a red character effect or a blue character effect) (S2911: No), the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. Since the (light emission pattern) can be used as it is, the process of S2912 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2903.

  In the process of S2903, as in the first control example, the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are reset to initial values (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the scenario storage area 223af and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2913), and this process is terminated.

  Further, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the present modification, when it is determined in the process of S2901 that the output of the origin sensor is off (S2901: No), it is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The operation scenario (light emission pattern) and the value of the step counter 2233ad are read (S2914), and the process proceeds to S2906.

  Further, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the present modification, when the process of S2907 is completed, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae updated by the process of S2907 is read from the scenario storage area 223af. Each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is set (S2915), and this process ends.

  Next, the lighting start process (S2822) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lighting start process (S2822). This lighting start process (S2822) is executed in the rotation operation setting process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is stable. This is a process for setting 40 light emission patterns.

  In the lighting start process (S2822), first, 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S3901). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is 10 (S3902). That is, as in the first control example, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed at which the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 has reached a sufficiently stable value has been reached. In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is not 10 (9 or less) (S3902: No), the rotation speed after the rotation operation is started is small, and the rotation speed is stable. Since there is a possibility that the process does not exist, the present process is terminated without setting the light emission pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3902 that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is 10 (S3902: Yes), the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario table 222f is read (S3903), and the read operation scenario is read out. On the other hand, the processing of S3904 to S3906 is performed in which the conversion is performed according to the effect type (red character effect, blue character effect, purple character effect) and stored in the scenario storage area 223af.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current rotation display effect is a blue character effect (S3904). If it is a blue character effect (S3904: Yes), the LED and light emission of the operation scenario read out in the process of S3903. After inverting the correspondence with the pattern, the inverted operation scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 223af (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3907. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3904 that the current rotation display effect is not a blue character effect (a red character effect or a purple character effect) (S3904: No), the operation scenario read out in the process of S3903 is processed. Without conversion, the data is directly stored in the scenario storage area 223af (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907 executed after the process of S3905 or S3906, the value of the action pointer 223ae is reset to the initial value (00H) (S3907), and the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223ae after the reset is stored in the scenario storage area. 223af is read and set to each LED1-40 (S3908), and this process is terminated.

  By this lighting start processing (see FIG. 128), the operation scenario is processed (converted) according to the effect type, and the light emission operation of each LED 1 to 40 can be started in the operation scenario after the processing (conversion).

  As described above, in the modification of the first control example, single-color LEDs are employed as the LEDs 1 to 40, respectively. Specifically, each of the LEDs 1 to 20 was replaced with a single red LED, and each of the LEDs 21 to 40 was replaced with a single blue LED. Thereby, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced and the cost rate can be reduced.

  Further, in the modified example of the first control example, the type of the LED to be turned on (red LED or blue LED) is switched every turn, and the lighting position and the unlighting position are controlled to be the same position. The production is configured to be executable. Thereby, the red afterimage generated by the light emission of the red LED and the blue afterimage generated by the light emission of the blue LED are combined, and the player can perceive it as a purple afterimage. Therefore, even with a small number of LED types, more colors can be expressed, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this modification, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is constant (one rotation in 0.1 seconds) regardless of the type of rotation display effect, but is not limited to this. For example, when a purple character effect is set, the rotation unit 500 may be configured to rotate at a rotation speed faster (for example, twice) than the rotation speed of other effects. By configuring in this way, the time interval from when one color LED emits light until the other color LED emits light at the same position can be shortened during the purple character effect. It can be perceived more clearly in purple. Therefore, the production effect can be further enhanced.

  In this modification, two types of red and blue LEDs are employed, but the type of LED is not limited to this, and any type of LED may be employed. For example, green and white LEDs may be employed, and yellow and orange LEDs may be employed. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. The LED is not limited to one color, and an LED in which two or more different color LED chips are arranged in one package may be adopted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the colors that can be expressed, so that it is possible to enhance the effect. Specifically, for example, as the LEDs 1 to 20, LEDs configured by a combination of a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED are employed as in the first control example. On the other hand, LEDs composed of a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow are employed as the LEDs 21-40. With this configuration, the color gamut that can be expressed can be expanded.

  In this modification, only two settings of lighting or extinguishing are provided as the setting of each LED 1 to 20 configured by red LEDs and the setting of each LED 21 to 40 configured by blue LEDs. That is, if the bit corresponding to each LED 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f is 1 (on), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each LED may be set more finely. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of levels of light emission states from the time of extinction to the time of full lighting. That is, by configuring the LED current value of each LED to be changeable in a plurality of stages (for example, 16 stages), the brightness of each LED may be adjusted so that gradation can be expressed. Then, as the operation scenario table 222f, the data corresponding to the lighting state of each LED is expressed by the number of bits corresponding to the number of steps (for example, 16 bits if there are 16 steps), and the rotation display operation setting process (FIG. 126). In the case of newly setting the light emission pattern in the reference), the LED current value of each LED may be updated from the read bit data. With this configuration, various colors can be realized in addition to the three colors of red, blue, and purple. Specifically, the red LED that has reached a predetermined lighting position is fully lit, and the blue LED that has reached the same lighting position in the next round is lit with half the brightness at the time of full lighting. Can be expressed. In this case, the LEDs 1 to 20 are composed of combinations of red, green, and blue LEDs as in the first control example, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are composed of combinations of LEDs of different colors (for example, cyan, magenta, yellow). It may be configured. With such a configuration, afterimages of more various colors can be realized. In addition, afterimages of colors that can be expressed by a combination of red, green, and blue and afterimages of colors that can be expressed by a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow can be switched at high speed in a very short time. By superimposing, it is possible to realize an afterimage having a wider color gamut than a color gamut that can be expressed only in red, blue, and green. Therefore, the production effect can be further enhanced.

  In this modification, only one operation scenario table 222f that defines a light emission pattern for red LEDs (for LEDs 1 to 20) is provided, and in the case of causing the LEDs 21 to 40 to emit light in a blue character effect or a purple character effect, Although the light emission pattern can be set for the blue LED by reversing and setting the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern in the light emission pattern for red letters, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two types of light emission patterns for red character production and light emission patterns for blue character production are provided. In the case of purple character production, a light emission pattern for red character production and a light emission pattern for blue character production. It is good also as a structure which switches to alternately for every round. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to express an afterimage display mode that does not have rotational symmetry in the upper and lower directions, so that the degree of freedom of the rotation display effect can be improved.

  In this modification, only three types are provided: a red character effect composed of only a red afterimage, a blue character effect composed of only a blue afterimage, and a purple character effect composed of only a purple afterimage. However, an effect in which afterimages of the respective colors coexist may be executed. Specifically, for example, a light emitting pattern having a light emitting position where only one of the blue LED and the red LED emits light and a light emitting position where both emit light may be provided. By comprising in this way, the variation of the display mode of the afterimage in a rotation display effect can be diversified.

  In the first control example and the modified example thereof, the light emission pattern for one rotation of the rotation unit 500 is defined as the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)), and the same data is processed as it is. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of different scenarios may be defined as the light emission pattern for one round, and the operation scenario to be applied may be switched for each rotation number of the rotation unit 500 (the value of the rotation number counter 223aa). The afterimage may be changed in accordance with the rotation speed (the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa). Specifically, for example, it may be an afterimage that looks as if each character is shaken by repeating three characters “win” close to each other or separate from each other according to the number of rotations. Further, the characters may be gradually changed according to the number of rotations (for example, “congratulations” characters). By comprising in this way, since the production | presentation aspect of a rotation display effect can be diversified, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 147. In the first control example described above, the number of entrances to the first entrance 64 and the number of entrances to the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r are 4 times, which are upper limit values, respectively. If a total of 8 entrances have been put on hold, a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) is executed to produce the same system over the variable display corresponding to the 8 entrances. A possible gaming machine was explained.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect to which a ticket (privilege) is given is displayed, and the number of tickets given in the grant effect. Accordingly, the reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game. In the reel production, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode in which three symbols are aligned (“○○○”, “△△△”, or “□□□”). Is given (that is, winning a winning jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started. The player who has recognized that the normal gaming state will be granted can be notified of the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, so that the benefits granted are improved (so-called promoted) Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this second control example, when the winning information is put on hold based on the winning of the game ball, the change type is deviated before the holding and the winning information with short fluctuation is continuously held. Based on this, the short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation type of the short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. When winning information that is a big hit based on the winning of a game ball is put on hold, the short reach is set to be executed three times as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning winning information is put on hold Is set so that the short reach is continuously executed twice as a continuous short reach effect. Accordingly, the player plays the game with the expectation that the short reach is continuously executed three times in the continuous short reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the rear image change based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the continuous short reach effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations gives the player an impression that the back image has been temporarily interrupted by changing the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, when the change of the back image based on the passage of time is executed (that is, the back image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, so-called island-linked effect) The rear image can be changed. Thereby, since the change of the back image based on the passage of time (so-called island interlocking effect) is executed without delay, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach production is ended in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel production described above) is given according to the progress degree of the finished continuous short reach production. Thereby, the dissatisfaction which a player feels when a continuous short reach production is ended on the way can be reduced.

  In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partly changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example. The difference is that the part is changed and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, among the effects executed in the second control example, a reel effect displayed during the execution of the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the first reel effect executed during the jackpot game is started, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the win reel effect as the reel effect. It is the figure which showed an example at the time of being performed and the specific aspect (display which three symbols align).

  FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing an example of when all reel effects are out-of-reel effects, and the last out-of-reel effect is completed, and FIG. 130 (b) is a probability variation gaming state. It is the figure which showed an example of the promotion ending effect performed when all the reel productions performed in the jackpot game transferred to (1) were the reel productions (or the reel production was not displayed). .

  The reel effect is an effect that is executed (displayed) during the execution of the jackpot game according to the number of tickets given based on the execution (display) of the granted effect. Specifically, the number of times that the reel effect can be executed is varied according to the number of tickets. For example, if one ticket is given, the reel effect can be executed once, and four tickets are given. If so, the reel effect can be executed four times. By displaying a specific mode (a display in which three symbols are arranged) in the reel effect, it is notified that the game will shift to the probability change gaming state after the jackpot game being executed is completed. This gives the player the impression that the degree of expectation that a specific aspect will be displayed in the reel effect in the jackpot game that will be executed thereafter is displayed by displaying the grant effect to which the ticket is granted. Can improve the interest of the game. In addition, since a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect, it is informed that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is being executed, but it is informed that the game is shifted to the probability change gaming state. It is possible to give an impression that the player has improved (so-called promotion) to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In this control example, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added (the number of tickets increased) by displaying the grant effect in the variable effect until the big hit game is started. When the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 1 or more, the reel effect can be executed in the jackpot game. When the reel effect is executed with the value of the ticket counter 223bb being 8, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the third symbol display device is executed when the fourth round jackpot game is executed. The reel effect display is started at the lower right of the screen 81. The reel effect displayed in the lower right corner of the screen shows three types of reels (circle, triangle, and square) that are rotated and displayed side by side. The text “You will be promoted if you arrange three within 8 times!” Is displayed. Further, in the upper right part of the screen, characters “Ticket × 8” indicating the number of tickets (ie, the value of the ticket counter 223bb) given by the granting effect executed until the jackpot game is started are displayed. Is done.

  The trigger for starting the reel effect is not limited to the start of the fourth round, but may be another trigger. For example, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be varied according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb, or the trigger for starting the reel effect may be varied according to the effect time of the reel effect to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) that the effect time of the reel effect exceeds the execution time of the jackpot game, and to display the reel effect appropriately.

  The reel effect in this control example is an effect in which one ticket is consumed (reduced) for each reel change executed once. FIG. 129 (b) shows a case where the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 129 (a) in which the number of tickets is eight, the reel variation is executed six times, and the hit reel effect is executed. It is a figure.

  When reel change is executed 6 times from the state where the number of tickets is 8 (see FIG. 129 (a)), the number of tickets becomes 2 and the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 129 (b). Is displayed on the upper right part of the screen. In the win reel effect, all the symbols displayed on the three rows of reels displayed in the lower right portion of the screen are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (here, a circular figure). On the upper part of the reel, a character “promotion get” is displayed, which suggests that a probable game state is given after execution of the jackpot game. Here, when the reel effect is executed, the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the execution of the jackpot game is displayed as the opening effect of the jackpot game. As a result, a winning reel effect is displayed for a player who has been recognized that a normal gaming state is to be granted after the jackpot game is executed, thereby providing a promising variable gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that the privilege to be given has been improved (so-called promotion), and to improve the interest of the player.

  After the winning reel effect is executed, since it is already informed that the probability variation game state is given after the jackpot game is executed, the reel effect is ended and the jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, a case where the winning reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects will be described. FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing an example where the winning effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects, and the eighth reel effect is executed (displayed).

  When the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129 (a)) and the reels are changed eight times, the number of tickets becomes zero, and the third symbol display device 81 is shown in FIG. 130 (a). Is displayed on the upper right part of the screen. Then, when the last release reach effect is executed (displayed) and the symbols of the three rows of reels are stopped and displayed with a symbol that is not the same symbol, the word “sorry!” Is displayed above the reels ( (See FIG. 130 (a)). Then, when the reel effect execution (display) is ended, and then the 16th round jackpot game ends, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed (displayed).

  In this control example, an image imitating a closed door is displayed at the center of the screen as an ending effect of the jackpot game, and an effect of opening the door is displayed. In the promotion ending effect, when the door is opened, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the word “promotion” is displayed in the opened door, and the probable gaming state is given after the jackpot game ends. Is notified. On the other hand, in the normal ending effect, an image imitating the door is displayed in the same manner, and the word “sorry” is displayed in the opened door. Thereby, even when the normal ending effect is displayed, the player can expect the door to be opened and the characters “promotion” to be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, the timing at which each reel is stopped and displayed in the reel effect is determined in advance, but is not limited to this. For example, each reel may be displayed in a stopped state when the frame button 22 is pressed, or based on a game ball passing through a specific area (for example, the first entrance 64). Alternatively, the display may be stopped. Thereby, each reel is stopped and displayed based on the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Similarly, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be started based on pressing of the frame button 22, or the passing of a game ball to a specific area (for example, the first entrance 64) Alternatively, it may be started based on the number of balls having a predetermined number of balls or more (so-called over winning) in the specific winning opening 65a.

  In this control example, the probability variation opening effect is provided to notify that the probability variation game state is awarded at the start of the jackpot game, but it may be omitted. As a result, since it becomes impossible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is given at the time when the jackpot game is started, attention can be paid to the effect during the jackpot game.

  In this control example, the reel effect is executed once for one ticket given in the grant effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number of sheets or more are accumulated, the reel effect may be executed once for a plurality of tickets, or for one ticket A plurality of reel effects may be executed. Further, a reel effect in which the effective line is changed (for example, three lines) may be executed (displayed) according to the number of tickets consumed. The number of tickets to be consumed may be determined by lottery or may be selectable by the player. In other words, the number of tickets to which a ticket is given by the granting effect may be stored, and the aspect of the reel effect to be executed may be varied according to the stored number of tickets.

  Next, the continuous short reach effect executed in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. The continuous short reach effect is an effect of notifying that the next fluctuation will be a big hit when the short reach is continuously executed three times. In the continuous short reach effect in this control example, there are four or more pieces of winning information held in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, four balls or more are held), and the variation type is out of the winning variation information. This is an effect that is executed when the game is continuously held. Details of conditions for setting the execution of the continuous short reach effect will be described later with reference to a winning command reception process 2 (FIG. 139).

  Here, when the winning information that is a big win is put on hold, the flow of setting the continuous short reach effect and the back change (special back setting) based on the passage of time during the execution of the continuous short reach effect The transition effect displayed on the screen will be described. In this control example, regardless of the number of winning information that is on hold (the number of holds), either the short fluctuation or the long fluctuation is selected by lottery as the fluctuation type.

  First, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), as the winning information stored (held) in the winning information storage area 223a, the change in hold 1 is short fluctuation, the hold 2 is short fluctuation, the hold 3 is short fluctuation, hold If the winning information that is a big win as the hold 6 is held in the state where the short fluctuation is stored in 4 and the short fluctuation is stored in the hold 5, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), from the hold that becomes the big win. The winning information up to the previous three is changed (overwritten) to be a continuous short reach effect. As described above in the first control example, the area of the winning information storage area 223a is an area of the hold 1 to the hold 8, and the hold timings are older in order from the hold 1 area (that is, executed). The winning information is stored in the order of early.

  Specifically, the winning information of the hold 1 and the hold 2 is not changed, the hold 3 is changed to the short reach (first time), the hold 4 is changed to the short reach (second time), and the hold 5 is changed to the short reach (third time) (overwriting). ) After 3 consecutive short reach is executed by the hold 3 to the hold 5, a big hit is started.

  Thereafter, when four fluctuations based on the hold 1 to the hold 4 are executed, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), the short reach (third time) is held in the hold 1 and the jackpot winning information is stored in the hold 2 It becomes. In the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this state, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), characters “morning mode” indicating the current background (mode) are displayed on the left side of the area Dm1 at the top of the screen. Characters “2 consecutive reach times” indicating the number of short reaches executed continuously are displayed in the center of the area Dm1, and “tickets” indicating the number of tickets given in the giving effect are displayed on the right side of the area Dm1. The character “× 2” is displayed. In the area Dm2 in the center of the screen, the second short reach effect being executed is displayed, and in the area Ds1b indicating the current number of reserved balls in the area Ds at the bottom of the screen, two circular figures are displayed. It is shown that the number of reserved balls is two.

  In this state, when it is the execution timing of the island interlocking effect, the change of the back image is executed, and the special back image (background in the city mode) is set. When the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the transition effect shown in FIG. 132B is executed. In this transition effect, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), an effect is provided in which a ticket (two here) given in the grant effect is given according to the number of consecutive short reaches (two here). The display indicating the number of tickets on the right side of the area Dm1 in the upper part of the screen is updated according to the number of tickets assigned and displayed in the center area Dm2. In addition, the fluctuation display that was displayed in the area Dm2 before the transition effect is displayed is variably displayed in a simple manner with only numbers in the area Dm3 at the lower right of the area Dm2, and is displayed in the center of the area Dm1. The display indicating the number of continuous reach is hidden. While the transition effect is being displayed, the variable display is displayed in a simple manner with only numbers in the area Dm3, so even if the transition effect display period crosses the timing when the next variable display is started The variable display can be executed.

  When the back image is changed to a special back image (background in the city mode), as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the short reach (third time) of the hold 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223a is lost and short. The change is overwritten (overwritten), and the continuous short reach effect is terminated. Thereby, the continuous short reach effect set before the back image is changed to the special back image can be ended at the timing when the back image is changed. As a result, since the back image and the effect of changing display can be executed integrally, the effect effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed. Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 133A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a provision effect selection table 222ba and a reel effect selection table 222bb are added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133 (b), details of the provision effect selection table 222ba will be described. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the provision effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the provided effect selection table 222ba is a table in which the type of applied effect selected corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is defined.

  Specifically, for the value “0 to 179” of the effect counter 223f, “none” indicating that the provided effect is not selected as the provided effect type is defined. Since the effect counter 223f is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the assigned effect type “none” is selected is 180/198.

  For the value “180 to 194” of the effect counter 223f, “grant effect A” indicating an effect in which one ticket is granted is defined as the grant effect type. The probability that this grant effect A is selected is 15/198.

  For the value “195 to 198” of the effect counter 223f, “grant effect B” indicating an effect in which two tickets are given is defined as the grant effect type. The probability that this presentation effect B is selected is 4/198.

  The granting effect to which the ticket is given is displayed by the granting effect selected based on the granting effect selection table 222ba. Whether or not the reel effect is executed in the jackpot game and the number of reel effects to be executed are varied according to the number of tickets given by the grant effect. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute (display) the giving effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. The details of the reel effect will be described in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137).

  Next, the contents of the reel effect selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (c). The reel effect selection table 222bb is a table for selecting an effect mode to be executed during the jackpot game according to the number of times that the above-described grant effect is executed and the ticket is granted. As shown in FIG. 133 (c), the reel effect selection table 222bb includes a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected, and a long reel effect selection table in which a reel effect with a long effect time is easily selected. 222bb2 is provided.

  Here, the details of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 and the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the reel effect type is defined in the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in correspondence with the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is a probable bonus jackpot, a short reel effect is defined for an effect time of 5 seconds with respect to the value “0-14” of the effect counter 223f, and the value “15— “19” is defined as a long reel effect per 10 seconds, the effect counter 223f is “20 to 169”, the effect time is off by 5 seconds, and a short reel effect is defined. For the value “170 to 198”, the effect time is off by 10 seconds and a short reel effect is defined.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the effect time is off by 5 seconds with respect to the value “0-149” of the effect counter 223f, and the short reel effect is defined, and the value “150-198” of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, a long reel production with a production time of 10 seconds is defined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), details of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described. FIG. 134B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2. As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the reel effect type is defined in the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in correspondence with the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a short reel effect is defined for the value “0-2” of the effect counter 223f, and the value “3-19” of the effect counter 223f is determined. A long reel effect is defined, an outlier short reel effect is defined for the value “20-149” of the effect counter 223f, and an outlier long reel effect is defined for the value “150-198” of the effect counter 223f. .

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a short reel effect is defined for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223f, and a long reel that is out of the value “100 to 198” of the effect counter 223f. Production is defined.

  Thus, in this second control example, a short reel effect with a short effect time and a long reel effect with a long effect time can be selected as the reel effect executed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the jackpot game. It has become. Thereby, the variation of reel production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a short reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected and a long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which a long reel effect with a long effect time is easily selected are provided, according to the progress state of the jackpot game. Which table is used is variable. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) that the effect time of the reel effect exceeds the execution time of the jackpot game, and to display the reel effect appropriately.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the promoted flag 223ba, the ticket counter 223bb, the reel effect setting timing 223bc, the reel effect timing counter 223bd, the continuous short reach counter 223be, The difference is that a short reach setting flag 223bf is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The promoted flag 223ba is a flag for determining whether or not an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is shifted to the probability-changing game state after the jackpot game is finished is executed (displayed). This indicates that an effect suggesting transition to the gaming state has been executed (displayed) (or has been executed (displayed)), and when off, it has not been executed (displayed). This promoted flag 223ba is set to ON when the winning reel effect is selected in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) (see S4110 in FIG. 137). Further, in the opening effect setting process (see FIG. 141), it is set to ON when the probability variation opening effect is selected (see S4106 in FIG. 141).

  Then, in the jackpot command related process 2 (FIG. 140), it is referred to when the ending command for the jackpot game based on the probable change jackpot is received (see S3334 in FIG. 140), and when the promoted flag 223ba is on (ie, When it has been notified that the game state has already shifted to the probability change game state), the probability change ending effect indicating the probability change jackpot ending is selected as the ending effect of the jackpot game (see S3335 in FIG. 140). On the other hand, when the promoted flag 223ba is off (that is, when it is not informed that the transition to the probability variation gaming state has been made), the promotion indicating that the probability variation gaming state is subsequently given as the ending effect of the jackpot game. Ending is selected (see S3336 in FIG. 140). As a result, in the jackpot game, it is informed that the transition to the normal gaming state has been informed, but the transition to the probability variation gaming state is informed, so that the benefits granted are improved (so-called promoted) ) Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The ticket counter 223bb is a counter for counting the number of tickets given by the executed (displayed) giving effect. This ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected provision effect when the provision effect is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3535 in FIG. 143). Further, when a special back surface set based on the passage of time is set during execution of the continuous short reach effect, it is added according to the number of executions of the continuous short reach effect (that is, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be). (See S3733 in FIG. 144). Then, it is referred to in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), and the reel effect corresponding to the value of the ticket counter 223bb is executed (displayed) during the jackpot game, and the reel effect is executed (displayed). Is subtracted by 1 (see S4016 in FIG. 137). In addition, when the winning effect is executed (displayed), the reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the same jackpot game thereafter, so the value of the ticket counter 223bb is initialized to 0 ( (See S4011 in FIG. 137).

  The reel effect setting timing 223bc is an area in which a value indicating the setting timing of the reel effect is stored. Specifically, the timing for setting the reel effect is stored as the elapsed time (milliseconds) from the start of the jackpot game. When the value of a reel effect timing counter 223bd described later coincides with the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined that it is the timing for setting the reel effect (see S4003 in FIG. 137).

  The reel effect timing counter 223bd is a counter for counting the elapsed time (milliseconds) from the start of the jackpot game, and is a counter for determining the execution timing of the reel effect executed during the jackpot game. This reel effect timing counter 223bd is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a big hit game is being played in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) executed every millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 136). (See S4002 in FIG. 137). Then, in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), it is referred to determine whether or not it is the timing of setting the reel effect (see S4003), and when the winning reel effect is executed, or the ticket counter 223bb When the value becomes 0 (that is, when the reel effect is finished), it is cleared to 0 (see S4012 in FIG. 137).

  The continuous short reach counter 223be is a counter for counting the number of times that the short reach effect is continuously executed. The continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 when a short reach variation pattern is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3537 in FIG. 143), and a variation pattern other than the short reach is selected. If it is, it is initialized to 0 (see S3539 in FIG. 143). The value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is referred to when a special back surface setting is executed based on the passage of time (see S3731 in FIG. 144), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is greater than 0 ( That is, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed), the transition effect corresponding to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is displayed.

  The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is a flag for determining whether or not the continuous short reach effect has been set. When the flag is on, the continuous short reach effect is already set. Indicates that reach production is not set. The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON when the execution of the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139) (see S3137 in FIG. 139). In the jackpot related command processing 2 (see FIG. 140), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, it is set to OFF (see S3332 in FIG. 140). The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is referred to in the winning command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139), and when the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is OFF, execution of the continuous short reach effect is set. ing. Thereby, it can prevent that a continuous short reach production will be set repeatedly.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 144. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a main process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 93). The main process 2 (see FIG. 136) is replaced with a command determination process (see FIG. 101) in that a reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) is added to the main process (see FIG. 93) of the first control example. The command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138) is executed, the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the change display setting process (see FIG. 105), and the special back setting process (see FIG. 108), the special back setting process 2 (see FIG. 144) is executed, and the prefetch effect selection process (see FIG. 109) is deleted, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the main process 2, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 93) in the first control example described above, the processes of S2201 to S2211 are executed.

  When the process of S2211 is completed, a reel effect setting process is executed (S2231), and the process proceeds to S2212. When the process proceeds to S2212, command determination process 2 is executed (S2212), variable display setting process 2 is executed (S2213), special back surface setting process 2 is executed (S2214), and the process proceeds to S2216. After S2216, the processing of S2216 to S2219 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

  Here, details of the reel effect setting process (S2231) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This reel effect setting process (S2231) is a process for executing (displaying) the reel effect according to the value of the ticket counter during the jackpot game.

  In the reel effect setting process (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed (S4001). In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the big hit game is not executed (S4001: No), this process is ended as it is because it is not the timing to execute the reel effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that the jackpot game is being executed (S4001: Yes), the value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd is used to count the elapsed time since the jackpot game was started. Is updated by adding 1 (S4002), and based on the updated value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd and the value of the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined whether or not it is the reel effect setting timing (S4003). .

  In the process of S4003, if it is determined that it is not the timing of setting the reel effect (S4003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4003 that the timing is set for reel production (S4003: Yes), the value of the production counter 223f is acquired (S4004), and whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 5 or not. Is discriminated (S4005).

  If it is determined in the process of S4005 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 5 (S4005: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game is 8 or more. (S4006). In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 8 or more (S4006: Yes), the value of the ticket counter 223bb (that is, the remaining number of executions of the reel effect) remains large. This is a case where the remaining time of the jackpot game is reduced. In this case, a reel effect is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f using the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected (S4007), and the process of S4009 Migrate to This makes it possible to execute all remaining reel effects during the remaining time of the jackpot game. If all of the remaining reel effects cannot be executed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb may not be initialized and may be taken over until the next jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4005 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 5 or less (S4005: No), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is small (that is, the remaining number of executions of the reel effect) is small. Therefore, a reel effect is selected using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which a reel effect with a long effect time is easily selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. Thereby, in the jackpot game, the reel effect does not end early, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S4006, if it is determined that the currently executed jackpot round number is smaller than 8 (S4006: No), it is a case where the remaining time of the jackpot game is large. A reel effect is selected using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which an effect is easily selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. Thereby, in the jackpot game, the reel effect does not end early, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S4009, it is determined whether or not the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is a winning reel effect (S4009). If it is determined in step S4009 that the winning reel effect has been selected (S4009: Yes), the promoted flag 223ba is set to on (S4010), and the value of the ticket counter 223bb is cleared to 0 (S4011). Then, the reel effect setting timing 223bc and the reel effect timing counter 223bd are cleared (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4009 that the winning reel effect is not selected (ie, the reel effect is selected) (S4009: No), then the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S4013).

  In the process of S4013, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4013: Yes), the reel effect is executed based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb. The timing at which the effect of the reel effect ends is updated as the value of the reel effect setting timing (S4014), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is decremented by 1 (S4015), and the process proceeds to S4016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4013 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4013: No), the reel effect is not executed in the currently executed jackpot game. In order to clear the information, the process of S4012 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4016.

  In the process of S4016, a display reel effect command indicating the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is set (S4016), and this process ends. The display reel effect command set in the process of S4016 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S2202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display reel effect command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a reel effect corresponding to the received command.

  Thus, the reel effect according to the number of tickets given by the grant effect is executed during the jackpot game by the reel effect setting process (S2231). In addition, depending on the progress status of the jackpot game (that is, the remaining time of the jackpot game), the reel performance is variable depending on whether a long reel effect with a long effect period or a short reel effect with a short effect period is easily selected. Is done. Thereby, the reel effect can be suitably executed according to the game time of the jackpot game.

  When a jackpot game with a short game time (for example, a two-round jackpot) is executed, a special reel effect (see FIG. 177) that consumes a lot of tickets given by the grant effect is executed. Also good. Thereby, even when a jackpot game with a short game time is executed, the reel effect can be suitably executed.

  Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during the jackpot game.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows a display screen at the time when a jackpot game with a short game time (two rounds) is executed and a reel effect is started in the jackpot game when the number of tickets awarded by the grant effect is eight. An example is shown.

  When the two-round jackpot game is executed, the reel effect is started at the timing when the first round is started. In this reel effect, the probability of winning three symbols (winning probability) is set differently according to the number of tickets consumed. Specifically, when the number of tickets consumed is three, the winning probability is 80%, when the number of tickets consumed is two, the winning probability is 60%, and the number of tickets consumed is one. In this case, the winning probability is 40%. The relationship between the number of tickets consumed and the winning probability is displayed at the center on the right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the winning probabilities differ depending on the number of tickets consumed, and the winning probability is set high when the number of tickets consumed is large, so that three symbols are available. Can be expected from the player.

  Then, on the upper part of the reel displayed as the reel effect, characters “2 consumption tickets” indicating the number of tickets consumed are displayed, and the first reel fluctuation display is executed. In the first reel change display, all the tickets (eight) may be consumed, and the winning probability may be increased according to the number of all the consumed tickets.

  When the first reel fluctuation display is completed, the screen shifts to the display screen shown in FIG. Specifically, the number of tickets is subtracted (consumed) from 8 to 6, the jackpot game round is shifted to 2 rounds, and the second reel variation display is started. In the second reel fluctuation display, the reel where three tickets are consumed is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the characters "Reel increased" are displayed in the upper part. Furthermore, a reel on which three more tickets are consumed is displayed at the top. A reel effect in which a total of six tickets are consumed is executed by the plural (two) reels.

  The probability of winning when three tickets are consumed is 80%, so the probability that one of the reels is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned) is 96%, with a higher probability. The reel effect is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. Thereby, the player's interest can be improved, and the reel effect can be suitably executed because the reel effect can be executed by consuming all the tickets given by the grant effect even in the big hit game with a short effect time.

  In this way, by changing the effect mode of the reel effect according to the type of the jackpot game, even in the jackpot game with a short game time, the reel effect can be executed using all the given tickets. The reel effect can be suitably executed.

  In the reel effect in which two reels are variably displayed at the same time, one benefit (the number of jackpot rounds is increased by 16 rounds) based on the fact that a specific display mode is stopped and displayed on one reel. Display) and another privilege (display indicating that the gaming state shifts to the probable gaming state) may be provided based on the fact that the specific display mode is stopped on the other reel.

  Further, the reel effect is executed during the jackpot game according to the number of tickets given by the grant effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to suggest the current gaming state, a reel effect may be executed (displayed) during execution of variable display. Specifically, when a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect, a notification is made that the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (a so-called latent probability variation gaming state). Thereby, even when the jackpot game is not executed, it is possible to execute the effect based on the ticket given by the grant effect, and to suitably control the number of tickets. Furthermore, the reel effect may not indicate the current gaming state but may indicate whether there is winning information that is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a.

  When the reel effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the reel effect effect mode (the number of tickets consumed, the effect time, etc.) is varied according to the variable display variable time. Also good. Thereby, the reel effect can be suitably executed (displayed) according to the variation time. Further, it may naturally be configured to vary the effect mode of the reel effect according to the timing at which the rear surface change is executed.

  Next, details of the command determination process 2 (S2212) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This command determination process 2 (S2212) is a big hit with respect to the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 101), in which a winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) is executed instead of the winning command receiving process. The difference is that the jackpot related command processing 2 is executed instead of the related command processing, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 2 (S2212), the processes from S3001 to S3009 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 101). If it is determined in the process of S3009 that a winning command has been received (S3009: Yes), a winning command receiving process 2 is executed (S3010), and this process ends. Details of the winning command reception process 2 (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), the process proceeds to S3011, and the processes of S3011 to S3013 are executed as in the first control example.

  In the process of S3013, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S3013: Yes), the jackpot related command process 2 (S3014) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the jackpot related command processing 2 (S3014) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the winning command reception process 2 (S3010) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The winning command receiving process 2 is a process executed when it is determined in the command determining process 2 (see FIG. 138) that a winning command has been received.

  In the winning command reception process 2 (S3010), first, the information of the received winning information command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3101), and the process proceeds to S3131.

  In the process of S3131, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131). If it is determined in the process of S3131 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is on (S3131: No), this process is ended as it is because the continuous short reach effect is already set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3131 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131: Yes), it is determined whether or not there are four or more winning information held in the winning information storage area 223a. It is determined (S3132). If it is determined in the processing of S3132 that the winning information that is on hold is 3 or less (S3132: No), the continuous short reach effect cannot be set, and thus this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3132 that there are four or more pending winning information (S3132: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current winning information is jackpot winning information (S3133). . If it is determined in the process of S3133 that the current winning information is a big hit (S3133: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134).

  In the process of S3134, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is greater than 19 (that is, a value of 20 to 198) (S3134: No), the continuous short reach effect is not set and this process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3134 that the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134: Yes), then all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three is out of the short fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is a variation type (S3135).

  In the processing of S3135, if it is determined that all the winning information from the current winning information up to the previous three is out of the short range (S3135: No), this processing is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3135, when it is determined that all of the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three are out of the fluctuation type of short fluctuation (S3135: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect Then, the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three is overwritten on the variation type of short reach (S3136), and the process proceeds to S3137.

  In the process of S3133, if it is determined that the current winning information is out (S3133: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138). In the process of S3138, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter is greater than 1 (that is, a value of 2 to 198) (S3138: No), this process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3139 that the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138: Yes), then all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous two is out of the short fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is a variation type (S3139).

  In the processing of S3139, when it is determined that all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous two is out of the short fluctuation type (S3139: No), the continuous short reach effect is not set and the present information is not set. The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3139, when it is determined that the winning information from the previous winning information to the previous two is out of the short fluctuation type (S3139: Yes), the previous winning information to the previous two Is overwritten on the short reach variation type (S3140), and the process proceeds to S3137.

  In the process of S3137, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf indicating that the continuous short reach effect has already been set is set to ON (S3137), and this process ends.

  Thus, when the winning information is a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set if the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the range of 0 to 198 is 19 or less. That is, when the winning information is a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 19/198 (about 10%). On the other hand, when the winning information is out, if the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less, the continuous short reach effect is set. That is, when the winning information is out of place, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 2/198 (about 1%). As a result, when continuous short reach production is set, there is a high possibility that the winning information is a big hit, so by executing the continuous short reach production, the player can expect a big hit. , Can improve the interest of the player.

  In this control example, the configuration is such that the continuous short reach effect is set when two or more outlier short fluctuations are set as the fluctuation type regardless of the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, you may comprise so that a continuous short reach effect may be set only when it is a time-short game state. In addition, the probability that the continuous short reach effect is set may be varied according to the gaming state.

  Next, details of the jackpot related command process 2 (S3014) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot related command processing 2 (S3014) is determined to have received a jackpot related command in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138) in the same manner as the jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 104) of the first control example. It is a process executed in this case.

  In the jackpot related command processing 2 (S3014), it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received as a jackpot related command (S3301). If it is determined that the opening command has been received in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the opening effect setting process is executed (S3331), the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to OFF (S3332), and this process is performed. Exit.

  Here, the details of the opening effect setting process (S3331) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This opening effect setting process (S3331) is a process executed to set an opening effect when it is determined in jackpot related command process 2 (see FIG. 140) that an opening command has been received.

  In the opening effect setting process (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S4101). In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S4101: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4102). In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (that is, the reel effect can be executed) (S4102: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4103). Then, the value of the effect counter 223f is discriminated (S4104), and the opening effect is selected.

  Specifically, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 99 or less (that is, a value of 0 to 99) (S4104: Yes), the probability variation opening effect is selected. (S4105), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4106), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is set to 0 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4112.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 100 or more (that is, a value of 100 to 198) (S4104: No), the reel effect is executed during the jackpot game. Then, the process proceeds to S4109.

  In the processing of S4101, if it is determined that the type of jackpot to be started is a normal jackpot (S4101: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 ( In step S4108, processing for executing a reel effect is executed according to the determination result.

  In the process of S4108, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4108: Yes), the normal opening effect is selected to execute the reel effect (S4109), and the reel effect setting timing is reached. 223bc is set (S4110), and the process proceeds to S4112.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4108 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4108: No), the reel effect cannot be executed, so the normal opening effect is selected (S4111). The process proceeds to S4112.

  In the process of S4112, a display opening effect command indicating the opening effect selected in any of the processes of S4105, S4109, and S4111 is set (S4112), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, when a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is executed, the opening effect similar to the case where the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot game is executed (that is, after the jackpot game) There is a possibility that an effect indicating transition to the normal gaming state is selected. In this case, when a specific mode (a display in which three symbols are arranged) is displayed in the reel effect executed during the jackpot game, it is notified that the game state shifts to the probability change gaming state. Thereby, even when the opening effect based on the normal jackpot game is displayed, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific aspect (display in which three symbols are aligned) is displayed in the subsequent reel effect, It can improve the interests of players.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S3303).

  If it is determined in the process of S3303 that the round number command has been received (S3303: Yes), the processes of S3304 and S3305 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot related command process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example. Then, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3303 that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S3306). In the process of S3306, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process is ended as it is. In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138), although it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received, an ending command has not been received (that is, various jackpot-related commands have not been received). If it is determined that an error has occurred, an error may have occurred, so error processing indicating the occurrence of the error (for example, outputting a sound indicating the occurrence of an error or setting a display error command) It may be. Thereby, the occurrence of an abnormality can be notified quickly.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3306 that an ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was based on a probabilistic jackpot (S3333). In the process of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the normal jackpot (S3333: No), the normal ending indicating that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is ended is selected ( S3337) and the process proceeds to S3338.

  In the process of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the probabilistic jackpot (S3333: Yes), it is determined whether or not the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334).

  In the processing of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334: Yes), it is a case where it is already informed that the game will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game, and therefore based on the probability variation jackpot A probability variation ending indicating that the jackpot game is over is selected (S3335), and the process proceeds to S3338.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is off (S3334: No), it is not informed that the game will shift to the probability change game state after the jackpot game, and the normal game after the jackpot game Since the transition to the state (similar to the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) has been executed, the gaming state that transitions after the jackpot game has changed (promoted) from the normal gaming state to the probable gaming state Is selected (S3336), and the process proceeds to S3338. By the process of S3336, the player can be given an impression that the privilege to be given has been improved (so-called promoted), and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the process of S3338, a display ending command indicating the ending effect selected in the processes of S3335 to S3337 is set, and this process ends.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S2213) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variation display setting process 2 (S2213) is a variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) instead of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) in contrast to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) of the first control example. Is different in that it is changed to execute, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2213), first, the processes from S3401 to S3403 are executed as in the first control example, and thereafter, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is set (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405. After S3405, the processing from S3405 to S3411 is executed and the present processing is terminated as in the first control example.

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) is a process for selecting a variation pattern display mode corresponding to the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 and setting a variation pattern command for display. Further, in the variation display executed by the set variation pattern, it is a process for selecting whether or not to perform the provision effect and setting a display provision effect command for displaying the selected provision effect. .

  In the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S3404), first, in order to set a fluctuation pattern, S3501 to S3506 (except for the process of S3504) are executed in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern selection process in the first control example, and a provision effect is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to S3531. In the process of S3531, it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less (S3531). In the process of S3531, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 9 or more (S3531: No), the process shifts to S3536 without setting the provision effect. As a result, the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes excessively large, and the occurrence of a problem that the reel effect that is executed (displayed) based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the jackpot game cannot be executed (displayed) is prevented. (Suppressed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3531 that the ticket counter is 8 or less (S3531: Yes), a grant effect is selected from the grant effect selection table 222ba based on the value of the effect counter 223f (S3532). Then, in the process of S3532, it is determined whether or not the provision effect is selected (S3533), and if it is determined that the provision effect is selected (S3533: Yes), the display provision indicating the selected provision effect is performed. An effect command is set (S3534), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected granted effect (S3535), and the process proceeds to S3536. In the process of S3535, specifically, when the grant effect A is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by 1, and when the grant effect B is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by two. . Therefore, in this control example, the provision effect can be selected when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less. In this case, the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes 10 which is the maximum value by selecting the provision effect B. Become.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio at which the provision effect is selected may be varied according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb. For example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8, it may be configured so that the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes 9 at maximum by giving only the grant effect A.

  Further, the ratio at which the grant effect is selected may be varied according to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. For example, when winning information that is a promising big hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it may naturally be configured to increase the ratio at which the effect is selected.

  In the process of S3533, when it is determined that the provision effect is not selected (S3533: No), the processes of S3534 and S3535 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3536.

  In the process of S3536, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3505 is short reach (S3536). In the process of S3536, when it is determined that the variation pattern is short reach (S3536: Yes), the continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 (S3537), and the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S3536). S3538), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3536 that the variation pattern is not short reach (S3536: No), the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0 (S3539), and this process ends.

  When the back change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON in the process of S3538, the back image change based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 94). Here, if the back image is changed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the continuous short reach effect is ended halfway. On the other hand, in the present control example, the back image is not changed even when the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the continuous short reach effect. Thereby, even if the player gets excited or mistakenly presses the frame button 22, the back image is not changed, so that the continuous short reach effect is prevented from being ended halfway (suppressed). it can. It should be noted that an image such as a character image may be displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous short reach effect, and the continuous short reach effect may be continued.

  Next, details of the special back surface setting process 2 (S2214) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the special back setting process 2, in contrast to the special back setting process (FIG. 108) in the first control example, the transition effect is displayed when the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special back surface setting process 2 (S2214), first, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S3701 to S3703 are executed. In the process of S3703, if it is determined that it is the special back surface switching timing based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 in the process of S3702 (S3703: Yes), then whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is greater than 0 It is determined whether or not (S3731).

  In the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is greater than 0 (S3731: Yes), a transition effect according to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be indicating the number of executions of the continuous short reach is indicated. A display transition effect command is set (S3732). The display transition effect command set by the process of S3732 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S2002) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display transition effect command, the display control device 114 displays a transition effect to which a ticket is given according to the number of continuous short reach times. As a result, even if the continuous short reach effect is ended by switching the background screen during the execution of the continuous short reach, the effect that the ticket is given is displayed, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  When the processing of S3732 is finished, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is updated according to the transition effect set in the processing of S3732 (S3733), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0, and the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf Is set to OFF (S3734), and the process proceeds to S3735.

  In the processing of S3735, the variation type corresponding to the transferred special back is re-selected and overwritten with respect to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the short reach, and the processing of S3704 is overwritten (S3735). Migrate to By the processing of S3735, the variation can be executed (displayed) with the variation type corresponding to the set special back surface.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3731, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is 0 (S3731: No), the process of S3732 to S3735 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3704.

  When the process proceeds to S3704, the processes from S3704 to S3707 are executed as in the first control example, and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by display control apparatus in second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a reel effect command process, a transition effect command process, and a grant effect command process are added in the command determination process (see FIG. 145). Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process, the processes of S6401 to S6411 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 113).

  If it is determined in step S6410 that a display ending command has not been received (S6410: No), it is then determined whether a display reel effect command has been received (S6431).

  If it is determined in step S6431 that the display reel effect command has been received (S6431: Yes), the reel effect command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the reel effect command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (a).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6431 that a display reel effect command has not been received (S6431: No), it is then determined whether a display transition effect command has been received (S6433).

  In the process of S6433, when it is determined that the display transition effect command has been received (S6433: Yes), the transition effect command process is executed (S6434), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the transition effect command processing (S6434) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (b).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6433 that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6433: No), it is then determined whether or not a display giving effect command has been received (S6435). In the process of S6435, when it is determined that the display effect command for display is received (S6435: Yes), the effect command command process is executed to display the effect during execution (display) of the variable display. (S6436), the process returns to S6401. Details of the giving effect command process (S6436) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6435, when it is determined that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6435: No), the processes of S6416 to S6420 are executed as in the first control example, and the process of S2601 is performed. Return to.

  Next, details of the reel effect command process (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing reel effect command processing. This reel effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reel effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reel effect command processing, first, a reel effect display data table corresponding to the reel effect indicated by the display reel effect command is determined, the determined reel effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S8501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the reel effect display data table is determined, and the determined transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

  Then, based on the reel effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8505), the reel effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, details of the transition effect command process (S6433) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the transition effect command process (S6433). This transition effect command process (S6443) executes a process corresponding to the display transition effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the transition effect command process, first, a transition effect display data table corresponding to the transition effect indicated by the display transition effect command is determined, the determined transition effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8602).

  Then, based on the transition effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the transition effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the giving effect command process (S6436) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the giving effect command process (S6436). The giving effect command process (S6436) executes a process corresponding to the display giving effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the giving effect command process, first, an giving effect display data table corresponding to the giving effect indicated by the display giving effect command is determined, and the determined providing effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8702).

  Then, based on the provided effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the giving effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, in the second control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the grant effect to which a ticket (privilege) is given is displayed, and the ticket given in the grant effect The reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game according to the number of games. In the reel production, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode in which three symbols are aligned (“○○○”, “△△△”, or “□□□”). Is given (that is, winning a winning jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started. The player who has recognized that the normal gaming state will be granted can be notified of the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, so that the benefits granted are improved (so-called promoted) Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present control example, the game state transitions after the jackpot game is suggested according to the effect mode of the reel effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the number of rounds of a jackpot game may be suggested. Specifically, when the reel effect is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned), the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds, and otherwise, the jackpot game ends in 8 rounds. What is necessary is just to comprise. In addition, depending on the number of tickets given and the type of ticket, a specific mode may be easily stopped and displayed in the reel effect.

  Moreover, although the case where the provision effect was displayed during execution of the variable display was given as an opportunity for the ticket being provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given based on a game ball entering the specific winning port 65a, or a game ball having a predetermined number of balls or more entered the specific winning port 65a (so-called over winning). A ticket may be given based on the above. Thereby, since the variation of the opportunity to which a ticket is provided can be increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the second control example, it is configured to execute the granting effect for granting the ticket based on the result of the lottery whether or not to grant the ticket, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, fish reach) is executed as a fluctuation display for displaying a lottery result of a special symbol. Further, a ticket may be given when a plurality of predetermined variation patterns are executed. In this case, the player can select an effect (or a combination of a plurality of effects) to which the ticket is given, and a variation pattern (for example, normal reach) that is not executed more frequently than a variation pattern (for example, normal reach). For example, it is preferable to increase the number of tickets given to those who select “Super Reach”.

  By configuring in this way, in addition to the fun of knowing the lottery result for the variable display for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol, the ticket is acquired (the privilege not based on the lottery of the special symbol is acquired) ) Because it is possible to provide fun, the production effect can be enhanced. Further, it is possible to allow a player to select (set) conditions (for example, variation patterns) to which tickets are given, and to change the number of tickets to be given based on the achievement difficulty level of the selected (set) conditions. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting a variation display to be executed in the future, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  In addition, when the game is ended in a state where the ticket is acquired, a specific effect right erasing unit that deletes the acquired ticket may be provided. Thereby, it can suppress that the acquired ticket will be used by the next player. Furthermore, information regarding the acquired ticket may be displayed in a mode (for example, password information or two-dimensional code information) that can be acquired by the player. Thus, the ticket acquired in the previous game may be continuously used by inputting information on the ticket acquired when the next game is executed. This makes it possible to increase the willingness to participate in the next game.

  In the second control example, the rate at which the effect to which the ticket is given is executed is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but the effect to which the ticket is given is executed based on the gaming state. For example, a gaming state that makes it easy to win a jackpot (such as a short-time gaming state in which a special symbol lottery can be executed more easily than a normal gaming state, or a special symbol that is easier than a normal gaming state) If a high-probability gaming state or the like that increases the probability of winning in the lottery is set, it is preferable to make it easier to give a ticket than in the normal gaming state. As a result, when the period until the jackpot game is executed (time or the number of special symbol lotteries) is short, it is possible to prevent the number of tickets to be given from decreasing, and the game state It is possible to execute an effect during the jackpot game (reel effect using a ticket).

  Also, if the number of acquired tickets is small (or not) immediately after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 or immediately after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot game using all the tickets won in the jackpot game), the jackpot will be won If this happens, there is a possibility that an effect using a ticket cannot be executed during the jackpot game (the number of times it can be executed decreases). Therefore, immediately after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 or immediately after the end of the jackpot game, it is preferable that an effect in which a ticket is given is executed under conditions different from the special symbol lottery (variation). For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) or a game ball is entered in the entrance provided in the game board 13, an effect in which a ticket is given is executed. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an effect using a ticket cannot be performed during a jackpot game even if the jackpot is won immediately after power-on or immediately after the jackpot ends.

  In the second control example, the ticket granting effect in which a ticket is given based on the game for the pachinko machine 10 is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is not in operation. Alternatively, the ticket granting effect may be executed. For example, the ticket granting effect may be executed when an RTC (real time clock) times a predetermined time. Thereby, the number of tickets can be automatically increased by the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is not playing, and the player can easily play the game.

  Further, in the second control example, an effect using the acquired ticket is executed during the jackpot, and based on the result of the effect, a game state (for example, a game state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (for example, However, the acquired ticket may be used for other purposes. For example, in a gaming state in which it is difficult for the player to determine whether the currently set gaming state is advantageous to the player (so-called latent probability variation state), an effect using the acquired ticket is executed. An effect that suggests (notifies) the current gaming state to the player may be executed as a result of the effect. In this case, the effect may be executed during a winning game (for example, a small winning game) in which the gaming state is not changed. This makes it possible to execute an effect using the acquired ticket even in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is easy to divert at least a part of the effect data of the effect executed during the big hit game by executing the effect using the period in which the hit game (small hit game) in which the game state is not changed is executed. Therefore, the amount of data used for production can be reduced.

  Furthermore, it is preferable to determine a period in which an effect executed using the ticket acquired by the player can be executed, and to set a specific effect from a plurality of effects based on the determination result. Thereby, for example, when a selection period for allowing the player to select whether or not to produce an effect is set and execution of the effect is selected during the selection period, it differs depending on the remaining effect executable period. An effect can be executed, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early. In addition, by providing a plurality of effects with different performance periods as effects executed using the tickets acquired by the player, for example, at various timings during the jackpot game or various jackpot games with different jackpot games An effect using a ticket acquired by a player can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured that the ticket is given by the granting effect and the number of tickets to which the ticket is given is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of tickets assigned may not be displayed. Moreover, it is good also as an aspect (for example, a bubble is displayed in a part of background) in which a provision effect is difficult for a player to recognize. Thereby, since the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be made to pay attention, the interest of a game can be improved. In addition, unexpectedness can be imparted when the reel effect is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this second control example, when the winning information is put on hold based on the winning of the game ball, the change type is deviated before the holding and the winning information with short fluctuation is continuously held. Based on this, the short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation type of the short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. When winning information that is a big hit based on the winning of a game ball is put on hold, the short reach is set to be executed three times as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning winning information is put on hold Is set so that the short reach is continuously executed twice as a continuous short reach effect. Accordingly, the player plays the game with the expectation that the short reach is continuously executed three times in the continuous short reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the short short fluctuation is changed (overwritten) to the short reach fluctuation type and the continuous short reach effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a continuous short reach production may be performed irrespective of the variation time of a special symbol. Specifically, when an outlier short variation is executed, the effect is controlled so that the short reach effect is executed once, and when the outbreak length variation is executed, the short reach effect is pseudo 2 The effect may be controlled so as to be executed once (so-called pseudo-ream may be used). As a result, the continuous short reach effect can be executed even when the short variation is not continuous as the special symbol variation display.

  Further, although the configuration is such that the fluctuation type of the short deviation is changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation type of the short reach, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the stop type may be changed to the reach mode without changing the variation type. Thereby, even if there are a plurality of types of variation times, it is possible to easily stop and display in a reach mode (specific mode) only by changing the stop type.

  In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the rear image change based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the continuous short reach effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations gives the player an impression that the back image has been temporarily interrupted by changing the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, when the change of the back image based on the passage of time is executed (that is, the back image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, so-called island-linked effect) The rear image can be changed. Thereby, since the change of the back image based on the passage of time (so-called island interlocking effect) is executed without delay, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach production is ended in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel production described above) is given according to the progress degree of the finished continuous short reach production. Thereby, the dissatisfaction which a player feels when a continuous short reach production is ended on the way can be reduced.

  In addition, when the continuous short reach effect is performed, you may naturally comprise so that the change of a back image based on pressing of the frame button 22 may be performed. Even when the back image is changed based on the press of the frame button 22, the transition effect may be displayed. When the back image is changed based on the press of the frame button 22, Of course, it may be configured such that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed.

  In the second control example, the eight hold effects in the first control example described above are not executed, but it may be configured so that the eight hold effects can be executed.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 161. In the first control example described above, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected or when it is detected that a specific time zone has been detected, only the back image displayed on the back side of the third symbol is changed. I was trying. That is, only the back image is switched while maintaining the third symbol and the reserved symbol, and the image data for displaying the third symbol and the image data for displaying the reserved symbol are common.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a stage (rear surface D) is provided in which the third symbol and the reserved symbol are switched to different modes together with the rear image. By comprising in this way, it can prevent (suppress) that a game becomes monotonous.

  Further, in the third control example, there is provided a hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol according to the expectation level of the winning information (hold ball) corresponding to the hold symbol. In this hold notice effect, since the player can recognize the expectation level that is a big hit according to the mode of the hold symbol, before the variable display corresponding to the hold symbol is started, Can give you a sense of expectation.

  In addition, if it changes to the back surface D in the state in which the display mode of the hold symbol was changed, the display mode of the hold symbol is also changed in conjunction with the back image. In this example of control, when it changes to the back D in the state where the hold notice effect is set, it changes to the hold notice effect corresponding to the back D. Thereby, it is possible to set an effect mode corresponding to the changed rear face type while continuing the hold notice effect before and after the change of the rear face type.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example on the configuration is that the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The configuration of the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. A part of the processing to be executed is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described in detail. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In FIG. 148 (a), when the back surface A is set as the back surface type, the hold notice effect is set to the third hold symbol HY1 from the right among the hold symbols displayed in the hold display area Ds1b. It is the figure which showed the display mode in the case.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the reserved symbol HY1 in which the reserved notice effect is set is set to a color different from that of the other reserved symbols. This color change is basically continued until the reserved symbol HY1 is moved to the execution display area and the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 is completed. Although details will be described later, in the reservation notice effect, the reservation symbol is changed to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. The degree of expectation that is a big hit is set so that blue is the lowest and the degree of expectation increases in the order of green, red, and rainbow. As a result, when a hold notice effect is generated, attention can be paid to the color in which the target hold symbol changes, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148 (b), a display mode when the back surface D is set will be described. This back D may be set by the player operating the frame button 22 during a period in which the back type can be changed. Specifically, in the third control example, the back type is changed in the order of back A → back B → back C → back D → back A →... According to the operation on the frame button 22. As described above, when the back surface D is set, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol are changed in addition to the back surface type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the third design is changed to a mode in which only the numerals are configured for the main display area Dm. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is changed to a mode in which the number of reserved balls is displayed numerically in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c of the small display area Ds. Further, the characters “simple mode” are displayed above the main display area Dm. In this way, when the back D is set, the 3rd symbol and the reserved symbol will be in a simple and easy-to-understand display mode, so that beginners of games and players who are not good at lively performances can play games with peace of mind. Can do.

  In addition, the display mode of the holding symbol at the time of change is common between the case where the display is changed to the back D while the holding notice effect is set and the case where it is not. On the back D, when the change is stopped, an effect corresponding to the hold notice effect (special hold notice effect) is executed. The details of the special hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 (a) and (b).

  FIGS. 149 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing display modes when the display is changed to the rear surface D in a state where the hold notice is set, and the variable display being executed at the time of the change is stopped. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), when the fluctuation is stopped, both the third symbol mode and the reserved symbol mode are displayed in the same mode as the case where the special hold notice effect is not set. In addition, the special hold notice effect is executed for 0.1 seconds out of 0.5 seconds when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the number “3” is displayed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 0.1 second only during the stop display. The number “3” indicates that the reserved symbol HY1 for which the hold notice effect has been set before the back type is changed to the back D is moved to the execution display area (variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 starts. Shows the remaining number of fluctuations). That is, each time the variable display is executed and the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed for 0.1 second, and the number is displayed by subtracting one by one for each variable display. . Thereby, the player who visually recognizes the numbers can easily understand the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the holding symbol HY1 for which the holding notice effect has been set.

  In addition, the color of the number displayed in the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) is set to the same color as the color of the hold symbol in the hold notice effect set before the change to the back D. . For example, when the player switches to the back D by operating the frame button 22 in the state where the hold notice effect to be changed to the red hold symbol is set, the special hold notice effect (FIG. 149 (b)). The color of the number displayed in (see) is also set to red. The same applies to other colors.

  Thus, in the third control example, as a kind of back surface type (stage), a back surface D that changes the display mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol in addition to the back image is provided. On the back surface D, the display mode of the third symbol is changed to a simple mode composed only of numerals, and the mode of the reserved symbol is also changed to a simple mode indicating the number of reserved balls in numbers. Since the reserved symbols are different from the other back surface types (back surfaces A to C), the hold notice effect set for the other back surface types cannot be applied to the back surface D as it is.

  However, if it is changed to the back D, and the configuration is such that the hold notice effect is discontinued, the player may have difficulty recognizing what number of the hold ball for which the hold notice effect is set. is there. Moreover, there is a possibility that the player may have a suspicion that the hold ball for which the hold notice effect has been set has disappeared due to the suspension notice effect being ended. On the other hand, if a hold notice effect is set, a method may be considered in which each hold symbol including the hold symbol HY1 for which the hold notice effect is set is displayed as it is after the change to the back surface D. However, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol do not match, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the display content.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, the display mode is the same when the display is changed to the back D, regardless of whether the hold notice effect is set for any of the hold symbols. doing. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display based on the holding ball for which the holding notice effect is set is executed is displayed for 0.1 second. By configuring in this way, the special hold notice effect can be executed without changing the form of the reserved symbol or the form of the third symbol, so that the rear face is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is set. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display content of D from causing an uncomfortable feeling. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the special hold notice effect is executed at the timing of the stop display of the third symbol that the player pays the most attention, the possibility that the player misses the special hold notice effect can be reduced.

  In this control example, the special hold notice effect is executed for 0.1 seconds while the third symbol is stopped. However, the timing and period for displaying the special hold notice effect is arbitrarily determined. May be.

  In this control example, the special hold notice effect is configured to display the remaining number of changes until the start of change display based on the hold ball with high expectation on the entire screen for only 0.1 seconds. It is not something that can be done. For example, in the state where the hold notice effect is set (see FIG. 148 (a)), when the display is changed to the back D, the remaining number of times until it corresponds to the hold symbol HY1, and the characters indicating the expected degree of the hold symbol HY1 It is good also as a structure which displays a symbol etc. on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to display characters “something will happen in three more times!” On the right side of the reserved ball number display area Ds1c. In addition, for example, when the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the reserved notice effect has been set is reached, the reserved symbol having the same mode as the reserved symbol displayed before the change of the back type is reduced. It is good also as a structure displayed on the display area Ds.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. First, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the ROM 222 in the third control example is different from the first control example in that a hold notice execution determination table 222dc is provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. The hold notice execution determination table 222dc is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect. In the third control example, every time a new winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to, whether or not to set a hold notice effect and whether or not the hold notice effect is set. The mode (the color of the reserved symbol) is determined. Details of the hold notice execution determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold notice execution determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 151, in the hold notice execution determination table 222dc, the range of the value of the effect counter and the type of the hold notice effect (the color of the reserved symbol) are associated with each type of winning information (lottery result). It is prescribed.

  Specifically, when the winning information is a win and super reach, the value “0” of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with “rainbow color” as the notice type. In addition, “red” is defined as the notice type corresponding to the range of the production counter 223f “1 to 12”, and “green” is assigned as the notice type to the range “13 to 22”. In addition, “blue” is defined in association with “23, 24” as a notice type. On the other hand, since the range of “25 to 198” is not stipulated, the continuous notice effect is set when the pending notice execution determination table 222 dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223 f is within this range. Not.

  On the other hand, when the winning information is a winning normal reach, “red” is defined as the notice type corresponding to the range where the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 7”. Also, “green” is defined as the notice type in the range of the value of the effect counter 223f “8 to 13”, and “blue” is associated with the value “14” of the effect counter 223f as the notice type. It is prescribed. On the other hand, since the range of “15 to 198” is not defined, the continuous notice effect is set when the hold notice execution determination table 222 dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223 f is within this range. Not. Since the hit normal reach has more random numbers (counter values) for which no continuous notice effect is set than the hit super reach, the hit super reach can be expected at the stage where the hold notice effect is set.

  When the winning information is removed and the super reach is reached, “red” is defined as the notice type corresponding to the range of the value of the effect counter 223f “90, 91”. Further, “green” is defined as a notice type corresponding to the range of the effect counter 223f “92 to 98”, and “blue” is associated as a notice type with the value “99” of the effect counter 223f. It is prescribed. On the other hand, since the range of “0 to 89, 100 to 198” is not defined, when the hold notice execution determination table 222 dc is referred to in the state where the value of the effect counter 223 f is within this range, the range is continuously displayed. The notice effect is not set. Random value (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous notice effect is set to be smaller than the hit super reach or the hit normal reach, so when the hold notice effect is set, it can be expected to become a big hit it can.

  When the winning information is lost and normal reach is achieved, “green” is defined as a notice type corresponding to the value “98” of the effect counter 223f. Further, “blue” is defined in association with the value “99” of the effect counter 223f as the notice type. On the other hand, since the range of “0 to 97, 100 to 198” is not defined, when the hold notice execution determination table 222 dc is referred to in the state where the value of the effect counter 223 f is within this range, the range is continuously displayed. The notice effect is not set. Random value (counter value) corresponding to execution of continuous notice effect is set less than hit super reach, hit normal reach and missed super reach, so if hold notice effect is set, it will be a big hit It can be expected.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 151, the “rainbow-colored” notice type can be selected only in “winning super reach”. As a result, since it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit when the reserved symbol becomes “rainbow color”, it will be a big hit until the player performs a variable display corresponding to the “rainbow” pending symbol. The game can be performed while giving a sense of superiority to the fact that this has been detected in advance. In addition, the “red” notice type is configured not to be selected in an outlier normal reach. As a result, when the “red” notice type occurs, it will be a big hit or it will be developed into a super-reach, so there is a strong expectation for the holding ball corresponding to the holding symbol changed to “red”. Can be made.

  Next, the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 152 (a). FIG. 152 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the work RAM 233 of the third control example includes a new hold notice command flag 233da and a hold notice information storage area in addition to the configuration of the work RAM 233 in the first control example (see FIG. 74). 233db. Various display data tables corresponding to the rear surface D are provided as types of display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. The various display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on, like the other display data tables.

  The new hold notice command flag 233da is a flag for determining whether or not to set a hold notice effect. If this new on-hold notice command flag 233da is on, it means that the on-hold notice effect is set (changes the aspect of the reserved symbol), and if it is off, it means that the on-hold notice effect is not performed. The new hold advance notice command flag 233da is set to ON when a display hold advance notice command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 158 (a)). The new hold notice command flag 233da is referred to in various image setting processes 3 (see S7552 in FIG. 161), and is set to off when the image data for the hold notice effect is developed (S7555 in FIG. 161). reference). Thereby, it is possible to display an image of the reserved symbol corresponding to the display reservation advance notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The hold notice information storage area 233db is a storage area in which data indicating the contents of the set hold notice effect is stored. In the reserved notice information storage area 233db, a dedicated storage area is provided for each reserved symbol, and data corresponding to the type of the reserved notice set for each reserved symbol is stored in each storage area. Specifically, for example, when “00H” is stored as the data corresponding to the type of the notice, it is confirmed that the hold notice is not set in the holding symbol corresponding to the storage area in which the data is stored. means. On the other hand, when “01H” is stored, it means that the “blue” notice type is set, and when “02H” is stored, the “green” notice type is set. If “03H” is stored, it means that the “red” notice type is set, and if “04H” is stored, “rainbow” This means that the “color” notice type is set. The display mode of the reserved symbol can be accurately updated by each data stored in the reserved advance notice storage area 233db.

  In the third control example, the special hold notice data table for setting the special hold notice effect when the back D is set is included in the display data table. Details of the special reservation notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. 152 (b).

  FIG. 152 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special reservation notice data table. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), only the display contents for the address (value of the pointer 233f) in the range of 02E1H to 02E5H are defined in the special reservation notice data table. As described above, since the value of the pointer 233f is updated every 20 milliseconds, display contents for 0.1 second (20 milliseconds × 5) are defined in the special reservation notice data table.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in this special hold notice data table, a back image for special hold notice is defined as a back image for each address (value of pointer 233f). Further, as the character 1, a special reservation notice symbol 3 is defined. In addition, eight types of 1-8 are provided in the special reservation notice symbol, and each is composed of a number image of 1-8. In the example of FIG. 152 (b), since the special reservation notice symbol 3 is defined, it is composed of the same number 3 image as shown in FIG. 149 (b).

  When a new display variation pattern command is received with the special hold notice effect set, the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern, the change display data table, and the current special hold notice effect The special reservation notice data table corresponding to the mode is selected. Then, in the display data table buffer 233d, the two kinds of read display data tables are synthesized. More specifically, in the variable display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the range of the pointer 233f corresponding to 0.1 seconds that is the execution period of the special hold notice effect (example in FIG. 152 (b)). Then, the data of 02E1H to 02E5H) is overwritten on the specified contents of the special reservation notice data table. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a table in which the special hold notice effect of each aspect is set and a table in which the special hold notice effect is not set as the variable display data table (0.1 corresponding to each aspect). Since it is sufficient to define only the data for seconds as a special reservation notice data table), the data amount of the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153, the winning information command receiving process 3 executed instead of the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example will be described.

  Of the winning information command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 153), the processes of S3101 to S3108 are the same as the processes of S3101 to S3108 of the winning information command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example, respectively. Is executed. Also, in the winning information command reception process 3 (see FIG. 153) in the third control example, whether or not the hold notice effect is set after the process of S3101 is completed, and the type when the hold notice effect is set. Is executed (S3121), and the process proceeds to S3102. Details of the hold advance notice setting process (S3121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the hold notice setting process (S3121). When the hold notice setting process (S3121) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current back face type is the back face D (S4201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode counter 223 i is “4” corresponding to the back surface D. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the back surface D is set (S4201: Yes), this process ends without setting the hold notice effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S4201 that other than the back D is set (S4201: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223ca (not shown) is greater than 0 (S4202). ). The hold notice counter 223ca is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed based on the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect is set, and the hold notice effect is set. Each time, the current number of reserved balls is set. Therefore, in the process of S4202, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

  In the process of S4202, if it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is greater than 0 (the hold notice effect is already being executed) (S4202: Yes), it is determined whether or not to set the hold notice effect. The processing from S4203 to S4207 is skipped, and this processing is terminated as it is. In addition, in this control example, it was configured not to set the hold notice effect redundantly, but may be set redundantly.

  In the process of S4202, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is 0 (S4202: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4203), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is obtained. When the holding notice execution determination table 222 dc (see FIG. 151) is compared with whether or not the holding notice for the new winning information is to be executed and the holding notice effect is set, the notice type is determined (S 4204).

  When the process of S4204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the determination made in the process of S4204 is a determination result of executing the hold notice (S4205), and the determination result corresponding to the non-execution of the hold notice is used. If it is determined that there is (S4205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4205 that the hold notice effect is to be executed (S4205: Yes), the display control device 114 displays the notice type of the hold notice effect specified from the hold notice execution determination table 222dc in the process of S4204. Is set to a display advance notice command (S4206). Next, the value of the holding notice counter 223ca is updated to the total value of the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (S4207), and this process is terminated. .

  By executing the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 154), it is possible to determine whether or not the hold notice effect can be executed and the notice type of the hold notice effect each time a new start prize is detected.

  Next, stop command reception processing 3 (S3051) executed in place of the stop command reception processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process 3 (S3051). Of the stop command reception process 3 (S3051), in each process of S3201 to S3206, the same process as that of S3201 to S3206 in the stop command reception process (see FIG. 103) of the first control example is executed. .

  Further, in the stop command reception process 3 (see FIG. 155) in the third control example, is it determined that the process of S3206 is completed or the continuous notice flag 223q is off in the process of S3202 (S3202: No), When it is determined in the process of S3203 that the value of the remaining notice counter 223r is 1 or more (S3203: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is greater than 0 (S3251). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

  In the process of S3251, if it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 0 (no hold notice effect is set) (S3251: No), it is not necessary to update the value of the hold notice counter 223ca. This process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251 that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 1 or more (S3251: Yes), then the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is decremented by 1 and updated (S3252). A display hold advance notice command for setting the display form of the hold symbol corresponding to the subsequent hold advance notice counter 223ca is set (S3253), and this process ends. By executing this stop command reception process 3 (see FIG. 155), each time the variable display ends in a state in which the hold notice is set, the hold symbol in which the hold notice effect is set is preferably displayed on the execution display area DS1a side. Can be moved to.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 161. First, with reference to FIG. 156, the command determination process of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. In the command determination process (S6302), as in the first control example, the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed. This is a process for execution.

  Of the command determination processing in the third control example (see FIG. 156), in each processing of S6401 to S6404, S6406 to S6416 and S6418 to S6420, S6401 of the command determination processing in the first control example (see FIG. 113), respectively. The same processes as those in S6404, S6406 to S6416, and S6418 to S6420 are executed. Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is received in the process of S6404 (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process in the first control example. Instead of (S6405), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S6451), and this process ends. Details of the variation pattern command processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S6414 that the display continuous notice command is not included in the unprocessed command (S6414: No), Next, it is determined whether there is a display pending notice command (S6452). If it is determined in the process of S6452 that the display pending notice command is included in the unprocessed command (S6452: Yes), the pending notice for executing the process corresponding to the received pending notice effect command. Command processing is executed (S6453), and this processing ends. Details of the pending notice command processing (S6453) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S6416 that a back image change command exists in the unprocessed command (S6416: Yes), the first control example. Instead of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 117A), the rear image change command process 3 is executed (S6454), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the rear image change command processing 3 (S6454) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (b).

  Next, referring to FIG. 157, the variation pattern command process executed in place of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) in the first control example in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) described above. 3 (S6451) will be described in detail. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command process 3 (S6451).

  Of the variation pattern command processing 3 (see FIG. 157), the processing of S6501 to S6505 is the same as the processing of S6501 to S6505 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) in the first control example. Processing is executed. Further, in the variation pattern command process 3 (see FIG. 157) in the third control example, when the process of S6502 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the currently set back surface type is the back surface D. A determination is made based on 233x (S6551).

  If it is determined in the process of S6551 that the currently set back surface type is the back surface D (S6551: Yes), then a hold notice is issued based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db. It is determined whether it is set (S6552). In the process of S6552, if it is determined that the hold notice effect is set (S6552: Yes), a special hold notice data table corresponding to the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db is determined. That is, the remaining number of times until the variable display based on the hold ball for which the hold notice effect is set and the notice type are specified from the data in the hold notice information storage area 233db, and the special hold notice data corresponding thereto. The table is determined from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the specified contents of the determined special pending notice data table are overwritten in the range of the value of the corresponding pointer 233f in the display data table buffer 233d (S6553), and the process proceeds to S6503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that other than the back D is set in the process of S6551 (S6551: No), or when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not set in the process of S6552 (S6552: No), Since there is no need to set execution of the special hold notice effect, the process of S6553 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6503.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158 (a), details of the pending notice command processing (S6453) will be described. This hold notice command process (S6453) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and as described above, the control corresponding to the display hold notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a process for performing.

  In this hold notice command process (see FIG. 158 (a)), first, a new hold notice command flag 233da is set to ON (S9001), and then a hold notice effect is set from the received display notice notice. The holding symbol and the type of the holding notice are extracted (S9002). Next, based on the extracted holding symbol and the type of the holding notice, the data in the holding notice information storage area 233db is updated (S9003), and this process ends. Based on the data in the hold notice information storage area 233db updated by the process of S9003, image data for the hold notice effect is specified in various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158 (b), details of the rear image change command process 3 (S6454) will be described. This rear image change command process 3 (S6454) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and corresponds to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 as described above. This is a process for performing control.

  Of the back image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, in the respective processes of S7201 and S7202, S7201 of the back image change command processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. , And the same process as that of S7202 is executed. Further, in the rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, when the process of S7201 is finished, next, whether or not the back type before the change (that is, the current state) is the back D. Is determined based on the rear image determination flag 233x (S7251).

  In the process of S7251, when it is determined that the current back surface type is the back surface D (S7251: Yes), the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol is changed in accordance with the change from the back surface D to another back surface type. The process at the end of the rear surface D is executed (S7252), and the process proceeds to S7201. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7251 that the back surface type at the time of receiving the back image change command is not the back D (S7251: No), the process of S7252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7202.

  Further, in the rear image change command process 3 (S6454) in the third control example, when the process of S7202 ends, the next received rear image change command is a command indicating a change to the rear D. Is determined (S7253), and if it is determined that the command indicates a change to the back D (S7253: Yes), the third symbol or the hold symbol is associated with the change from the other back type to the back D. The process at the time of the rear surface D transition for changing the aspect of (2) is executed (S7254), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7253, when it is determined that the command is not a command indicating the change to the rear surface D (S7253: No), the process of S7254 is skipped and this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the details of the back D end time process (S7252) executed in the above-described back image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) will be described. As described above, the back surface D end time process (S7252) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol in accordance with the change from the back surface D to another back surface type.

  In the processing at the end of the rear surface D, first, the variation display data table after the change to the rear surface D corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is read and overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d. (S9101). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d is determined, and overwritten in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9102). In each of these processes, since the value of the pointer 233f is held without being initialized, even if the frame button 22 is operated in the middle of the variable display, the variable display is resumed in the changed mode. Can do.

  Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not a hold notice is set (S9103), and if a hold notice effect is set (S9103: Yes), the hold is held. The reserved symbol data corresponding to the mode of the reserved notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is developed (S9104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9103, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not set (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and this process is ended as it is.

  Thus, by executing the process at the end of the back surface D, the display type such as the back surface type and the third symbol can be changed from the middle of the variable display being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the back D transition processing (S7254) executed in the above-described back image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) will be described. This back D transition process (S7254) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol in accordance with the change from the other back type to the back D.

  In this rear D transition processing (see FIG. 160), first, the display data table buffer 233d is determined by determining the back surface D variation display data table corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S9201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set variable display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9202).

  Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is set (S9203). If the hold notice effect is set (S9203: Yes), the hold is held. A special pending notice data table corresponding to the style of the pending notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is determined and specified in the determined special pending notice data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The specified contents of the special reservation advance notice data table are overwritten on the pointer value range (S9204), and this process ends. As a result, when the hold notice effect is set and the display is changed to the back D during the change display, the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) is changed from the change display stop display during the change. ) Can be performed. On the other hand, in the process of S9203, when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not set (S9203: No), the process of S9204 is skipped and this process is ended as it is.

  In this way, by executing the process at the time of transition to the rear surface D, the display mode such as the rear surface type and the third symbol can be changed from the middle of the variable display being performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 161, various image setting processing 3 (S7453) executed in display setting processing (see FIG. 118) instead of various image setting processing (see FIG. 119) in the first control example. Details will be described. This various image setting process 3 (S7453) is a process for setting various images such as a reserved symbol and an image at the time of a continuous notice effect (eight-hold effect).

  Among the various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161), in the processes of S7501 and S7503 to S7509, the processes of S7501 and S7503 to S7509 in the various image setting processes (see FIG. 118) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing is executed.

  Also, in the various image setting processes (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S7501 that the new reserved ball number flag 233m is on (S7501: Yes), then the number of reserved symbols The reserved symbol data corresponding to the value of the counter 233n and the current back surface type (the state of the back image discrimination flag 233x) is developed (S7551), and the process proceeds to S7503. Specifically, in the process of S7551, if the back surface type is other than the back surface D, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is developed in the reserved display area Ds1b. On the other hand, in the case of the back D, the numerical data corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is developed in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c.

  In the various image setting processing 3 (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, has it been determined that the new continuous notice command flag 233o is off in the processing of S7504 (S7504: No), or the processing of S7506 is ended. In this case, it is determined whether or not the new pending notice command flag 233da is on (S7552). If it is determined in the process of S7552 that the new pending notice command flag 233da is on (S7552: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the currently set back surface type is the back surface D (S7553). If it is determined that the back D is not released (S7553: No), the reserved symbol data corresponding to the data stored in the reserved advance notice information storage area 233db is developed (S7554), and the process proceeds to S7555. On the other hand, in the process of S7553, when it is determined that the currently set back surface type is the back surface D (S7553: Yes), the process of S7554 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7555.

  In the process of S7555, the new pending notice command flag 233da is set to OFF (S7555), and the process proceeds to S7507. If it is determined in the process of S7504 that the new pending notice command flag 233da is off (S7552: No), the process of S7553 to S7555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7507.

  By executing the various image setting processes 3 (S7453), it is possible to set an appropriate display mode in consideration of the set rear surface type and the hold notice effect.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the back surface D in which the 3rd symbol and the reserved symbol are switched to different modes among the back surface types that can be changed based on the player's operation on the frame button 22. It is set as the structure which provides. Specifically, the 3rd symbol is changed to a symbol composed only of numbers, and a simple display mode rear surface type is provided for displaying the number of reserved balls by a single retained symbol composed of numbers. . By configuring in this way, when the back image is changed to the back D, it is possible to make the player feel novel, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the third control example, when the hold type notice effect in which the mode (color tone) of the hold symbol changes is set and the back face type is changed to the back face D, the hold notice effect is associated with the back face D. It is set as the structure changed into an aspect. Specifically, for each stop display of the 3rd symbol, for the remaining 0.1 seconds, the remaining number of changes until the change display corresponding to the hold ball for which the hold notice is set is executed is displayed numerically, It is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the hold notice by the color of the numbers. By configuring in this way, it is possible to take over the hold notice effect set in the back type before the change without breaking the concept of the simple and easy-to-understand display mode of the back D. Moreover, it can suppress that a player misses the special reservation notice effect by performing the special reservation notice effect at the time of the stop display of the 3rd symbol which a player pays the most attention.

  In the third control example, the special hold notice effect is performed when the back face D is changed. However, when the hold notice effect is set and another back type is changed, It is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of a hold notice effect. By differentiating the mode of the hold notice effect for each rear type, the form of the hold notice effect can be diversified. In addition, when the rear type is changed, the hold notice effect itself may be canceled. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the hold notice effect is set or not, if the back type is changed, it is only necessary to develop the same hold symbol aspect, and therefore it depends on the change of the back type. Processing load can be reduced.

  In the third control example, when the hold notice effect is set, the color change is performed only once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the color can be changed in a plurality of stages from the time when the reserved symbol is newly displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b based on the start winning, until the corresponding variable display ends. Specifically, for example, when a holding symbol for which a holding notice is set by a holding notice setting process (see FIG. 154) is displayed, a predetermined trigger (for example, start of variable display corresponding to another holding symbol) It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery of whether the aspect of a holding | maintenance symbol is upgraded to a mode with a higher expectation degree at a timing or the timing of a new start winning prize). In this case, in the lottery of the hold notice effect at the time of starting winning, the probability of being set to blue or green corresponding to the low expectation is configured to be high so that the hold ball corresponding to the highly anticipated hold ball Even in such a case, it may be configured to easily change from a mode corresponding to the low expectation level to a high expectation level step by step. By configuring in this way, even when a low-expectation hold notice effect occurs, it can be expected to change to a mode corresponding to a high expectation level thereafter, so that the player can win a big hit You can have a sense of expectation more often. In addition, in a configuration in which the rank of the hold notice effect can be increased, when the change is made to the back D while the hold notice effect is set, the structure in which the rank up lottery is performed in the same manner as when the back type is not changed. It is good. Note that when the rank-up lottery is won in the special hold notice effect, the character color of the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) displayed while the change is stopped is changed to the color after the rank up. Alternatively, it may be configured to separately provide a rank-only effect in a state where the special hold notice effect is set. As special effects for rank up in special hold notice effect, for example, at the timing of winning the rank, a special character appears, the color of the back is changed, the word `` Rank up '' is displayed, etc. Illustrated. By configuring in this way, even if the back D is set, the player can clearly understand that the player has won the rank-up lottery. Moreover, in the back surface D, it is good also as a structure which makes the timing which rank-up lottery differs from other back surface classifications. Specifically, for example, in the back A to C, the rank-up lottery is performed every time the fluctuation start timing is set in the state where the hold notice effect is set, while the back D is set, the fluctuation It is good also as a structure which performs a rank up lottery at the time of a stop. And, in the case of winning the rank-up lottery on the back surface D, the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) executed during the stop display of the third symbol is executed together with the rank-up effect. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect a rank increase at different timings according to the set rear surface type. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Modification of the hold notice effect in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a modified example of the hold notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the hold notice effect in the above-described third control example, as the hold notice effect, the expectation degree of the reserved symbol is suggested by changing the color of the reserved symbol. That is, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to set a holding notice separately for each holding symbol (regardless of the result of prefetching other holding balls). On the other hand, in this modification, instead of changing the mode of the reserved symbol, a display mode in which a combination of the prefetched results of one or more held balls being held is converted into a numerical value (point) and displayed. did. And it was set as the structure converted into the point of a big number, so that the holding ball with high expectation is held. Thereby, the expectation with respect to becoming a big hit can be heightened, so that the point displayed is large.

  In this modified example, when the look-ahead result of the holding ball is completely off, it is converted to 1 point, when it is out of normal reach, it is converted into 2 points, and when it is out of super reach or various big hits, it is converted to 10 points. It is said.

  First, with reference to FIG. 174 (a), the configuration of the sub display area Ds in the present modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the present modification, a horizontally elongated display area (point display area) for displaying points is formed in the upper right of the sub display area Ds when viewed from the front. In the example of FIG. 174 (a), the standby state (fluctuation stop state) is shown, and since there is no reserved symbol, “0pt” is displayed as a point.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 (b) to (e), a method of increasing / decreasing points when the number of reserved balls increases / decreases will be described. FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when five start winnings are detected during the fluctuation corresponding to the deviation and five holding symbols appear in the holding display area Ds1b during the fluctuation. is there. In addition, as a holding ball corresponding to the five reserved symbols, four complete misses (1, 2, 4, and the fifth reserved symbol) and one miss super reach (the third reserved symbol) The case where it comprises is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), when the number of holding balls increases during the fluctuation, one point is uniformly added as a temporary point for each holding ball. As a result, the characters “5pt” are displayed in the point display area.

  Then, when the out-of-fluctuation fluctuation is finished and each reserved symbol is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, for each reserved ball corresponding to the four reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift. Pre-read and calculate accurate points. It should be noted that the holding symbols displayed in the holding display area Ds1b after the shift are composed of one holding symbol (10 points) corresponding to detachment super reach and three holding symbols (1 point) corresponding to complete detachment. Therefore, the exact point is 13 points. Therefore, the characters “13pt” are displayed in the point display area.

  Pre-reading at the time of winning a start and reflecting the exact point immediately, instead of changing the display of the accurate point at the end of the variable display (shift of the holding symbol), and reflecting it When a plurality of reserved ball symbols increase, the breakdown of points can be made difficult to be recognized by the player. Therefore, when a plurality of reserved balls increase, when a large number of points are increased at the end of the variable display, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for jackpots for all the increased reserved balls.

  After the accurate point is reflected, it becomes the end timing of the variable display, and every time one reserved symbol is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the point corresponding to the shifted reserved symbol is subtracted from the point display area. Is done. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174 (d) and 174 (e), when the reserved symbol corresponding to the complete deviation (1 point) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the points displayed in the point display area 1 point is subtracted from (see FIG. 174 (d)), and when the reserved symbol corresponding to the outlier super reach (10 points) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, 10 points from the point displayed in the point display area Is subtracted (see FIG. 174 (e)).

  Thus, in this modification, the mode of the hold notice effect is configured in a mode in which the look-ahead result for each reserved symbol is converted into points, and the total value of the points for each reserved symbol is displayed in the point display area. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is difficult to understand which is the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball with high expectation, so when a large number of points are displayed in the point display area, A sense of expectation for the big hit can be given to the reserved balls corresponding to all the reserved symbols displayed in the display area Ds1b.

<Modification of special hold notice effect in third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, a modified example of the special hold notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the third control example described above, when the hold notice effect is set, the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 5) is changed when the third symbol aspect or the reserved symbol aspect is changed to the rear face D different from the other rear face types. 149 (b)) has been described. On the other hand, in the present modification, when the back face type is switched between the back face types other than the back face D, the mode of the holding notice effect is changed. An example will be described.

  Here, a case where the rear surface A is changed to the rear surface B will be described as an example. The back A and B are stages in which the display pattern of the third symbol and the reserved symbol is common and only the back image is different. FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back A is set and the hold notice effect is set in the third hold symbol HY1 from the left of the hold display area Ds1b. The mode of the hold notice effect executed on the back surface A is the same as that in the third control example described above. That is, in accordance with the pre-read result for the reserved ball, an effect of changing the display color of the reserved symbol displayed corresponding to the reserved ball to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the player presses the frame button 22 in the state where the hold notice effect is set and the back image is changed to the back B, the hold display area Ds1b is changed along with the change of the back image. The display mode of each reserved symbol including the reserved symbol HY1 is reset to the normal reserved symbol mode. It should be noted that the apparent display mode is merely changed to the display mode of the normal reserved symbol, and the setting of the holding notice effect itself is stored.

  Thereafter, each time a new change display start timing is reached, a lottery (holding notice revival lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the display mode of the hold notice effect is to be restored. As shown in (b), the setting of the hold notice effect before changing the back image is restored.

  It should be noted that, in the hold notice resurrection lottery, the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect has been set before changing the rear image is the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball having a high expectation, so that it is easier to be determined to be a winner. Is set. Specifically, for example, if the holding notice is a holding symbol of a holding ball corresponding to hit super-reach or hit normal reach, after changing the back image, it will be put into the holding notice resurrection lottery at a rate of 50% every time the change starts. If the winning ballot is held and the reserved ball is a holding ball with a holding symbol that corresponds to Super Reach, after changing the back image, it will be selected for the holding ballot revival lottery at a rate of 30% each time the change starts, and the holding ballot will come off and the normal reach will be lost. If it is a holding symbol corresponding to, after changing the back image, it will win the holding notice revival lottery at a rate of 10% every time the change starts. In other words, the higher the expected degree of the holding ball, the easier it is to win the holding notice resurrection lottery. Thereby, when a reservation notice revives after changing back classification, a player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be raised. Further, a player who wants to determine the expectation level of the hold notice effect depending on whether or not the hold notice effect is restored can actively change the back surface type during the setting of the hold notice effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Modification of Rotating Unit 500>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, modifications of the rotating unit 500 used in the above-described embodiments or control examples will be described. In order to simplify the description, the structure of the versatile writer illustrated below will be described using a configuration in which the number of LEDs 532 is reduced to eight (LEDs 1 to 8).

  The rotating unit 500 described above is formed in a long shape around the rotation axis, and the display surface side (the front side of the gaming machine) of the long shaped rotating unit 500 has a uniform opening through which light can be transmitted (of the rotating unit 500). By irradiating light from the back side (lower side in view of FIG. 162) to 40 diffusion plates provided in the longitudinal direction) using 40 sets of LEDs corresponding to each diffusion plate, The light divided into 40 is visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

  By comprising in this way, the display effect in a wide area | region can be performed with respect to a player by performing rotation control of the rotation unit 500, and light emission control of LED.

  However, in the structure of the rotation unit 500 described above, a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 28), and therefore the distances of the LEDs 532 from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 are different. become. As a result, when the rotary unit 500 is rotated, a stronger centrifugal force is applied to the LED disposed at a position far from the rotation axis than to the LED disposed at a position near the rotation axis. Therefore, there is a problem that damage or malfunction is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, in the first modification of the rotating unit 500, the LEDs 532 (LED1 to LED8) forming the rotating unit 500 are disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, and are disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. A light guide path for transmitting light emitted from each LED 532 to each diffusion plate partitioned into 8 is provided. Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the centrifugal force applied to each LED 532 can be reduced, and damage or malfunction of the LED 532 can be suppressed (prevented). In addition, since each LED 532 is configured to have the same distance from the rotation shaft 580e of the rotation unit 500, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the force applied to the LED during the rotation operation from being biased to some LEDs.

  Specifically, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the first modification as viewed from above such that the upper side of the drawing is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), a central wall 580e that divides the inside of the rotary unit into left and right is provided at the center of the rotary unit 500, and LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged on the left side of the central wall 580e. The LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged on the right side.

  Eight sections (openings 580a1 to 580a8) are provided in a horizontal row on the front side of the rotation unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine), and are provided in the respective sections (openings 580a1 to 580a8). When the light irradiated from each LED 532 described above hits a diffusion plate (not shown), it is possible to visually recognize that each section is lit from the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine).

  A light guide path is provided inside the rotation unit 500 so that light is emitted from only the corresponding LEDs to the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a8. Specifically, the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first light guide path 580d1, the direction in which the light is guided by the reflecting member 580c1 provided at the tip of the first light guide path 580d1, is changed, and the second It passes through the light guide path 580b1 and reaches the diffusion plate provided in the opening 580a1. Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs 2 to 8 passes through the first light guide paths 580d2 to 580d8, the direction of light guided by the reflecting members 580c2 to 580c8 is changed, and the second light guide paths 580b2 to b8 are transmitted. Passing through, it is possible to reach the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a2 to a8, respectively. Each of the first light guide paths 580d1 to 580d8 is configured independently, and each of the second light guide paths 580b1 to 580b8 is configured independently. Thereby, the light irradiated from each LED1-8 can be made to reach only corresponding opening part 580a1-580a8, and the afterimage display generate | occur | produced when the diffusion plate of each opening part (partition) 580a1-580a8 lights. The outline of can be clarified.

  Thus, in this 1st modification, each LED1-8 is collectively arrange | positioned in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. As a result, the rotational starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotating operation can be improved. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in the second modification of the rotating unit 500, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is configured to enter the reflecting plate, and the angle of the reflecting plate is variably controlled. The section (opening) to be lit is made variable by changing the direction in which the irradiated light propagates. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the LEDs 532 corresponding to the respective sections (openings), so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Specifically, a second modification of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the second modification as viewed from above such that the upper side of the drawing is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (b), inside the rotary unit 500 in the second modified example, the LED 1 for lighting the diffusion plate provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4 on the left side of the rotary unit 500, and the rotary unit The LED 2 for lighting the diffusion plate provided in the openings 580a5 to 580a8 on the right side of the 500 is provided. The LED 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine (the back side of the rotating unit 500) in the vicinity of the rotating shaft in the left region divided by the central wall portion 585g that divides the inside of the rotating unit 500 into left and right. On the other hand, the LED 2 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine (the back side of the rotating unit 500) in the vicinity of the rotating shaft in the right region divided by the central wall portion 585g inside the rotating unit 500.

  A partition member 585c1 formed of a plastic colored in black is provided in the left region inside the rotation unit 500 so that light does not directly propagate from the LED 1 provided in the vicinity of the rotation axis to the openings 580a1 to 580a4. The rotating unit 500 is erected (integratedly molded) from the back side of the gaming machine (the back side of the rotating unit 500). Here, among the areas partitioned by the partition member 585c1, the area near the rotation axis and where the LED 1 is provided is referred to as a first area 585d1, which is on the side farther from the rotation axis than the first area and has an opening 580a1. A region where ˜580a4 is provided is referred to as a second region 585e1.

  A reflection member 585a1 is provided in a region on the front side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis inside the rotation unit 500, and at a position where light from the LED 1 disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine is incident. After the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first region 585d1, it is reflected by the reflecting member 585a1 and propagates to the second region 585e1. The light propagated to the second area 585e1 is reflected by the reflection wall portion 585f1 provided on the back side of the gaming machine in the second area 585e1, and propagated to the front side of the gaming machine. If the propagated tip is one of the openings 580a1 to 580a4, light is irradiated to the diffusion plate arranged there, and the diffusion plate is turned on.

  The direction in which the light propagating through the second region 585e1 is propagated is determined by the angle reflected by the reflecting member 585a1. Here, the reflection member 585a1 is provided with a drive motor 585b1 for adjusting the angle. By driving the drive motor 585b1 and changing the angle of the reflection member 585a1, light incident from the LED 1 is reflected. The direction of reflection (destination of propagation) can be varied.

  The configuration in which the diffusion plates of the openings 580a5 to 580a8 are lit by the LED 2 is the same as the configuration in which the diffusion plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4 are lit by the LED 1, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  As described above, in the second modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotation unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflection plate, and the angle of the reflection plate is variably controlled. By changing the direction in which the transmitted light propagates, the section (opening) to be lit is made variable. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the LEDs 532 corresponding to the respective sections (openings), so that power consumption can be reduced.

  In addition, the LED, the reflecting member, and the like are integrated in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotational starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotating operation can be improved. The production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, you may make it make the color lit by opening part 580a1-a4 different from the color lit by opening part 580a5-a8 by making the wavelength (color) of light of LED1 and LED2 differ. For example, LED1 is a red LED and LED2 is a blue LED. As a result, the color that is displayed afterimages when rotated is made red, blue, and a combination of red and blue (purple), and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in a third modification of the rotation unit 500, light emitted from the LED 532 provided in the rotation unit 500 is provided on the surface portion of the rotation unit 500 via an optical fiber (light guide path). Configured to reach. Thereby, lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 can be controlled while the LEDs 532 are disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, a third modification of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the third modification as viewed from above such that the upper side of the drawing is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (a), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotating unit into left and right portions is provided at the central portion of the rotating unit 500, and the LED 1 is located near the rotating shaft in the left region of the central wall portion 590f. Internal sections 590a1 to 590a4 in which ˜4 are arranged are arranged. On the other hand, internal sections 590a5 to 590a8 in which the LEDs 5 to 8 are disposed are disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis in the right region divided by the central wall portion 590f.

  The internal sections 590a1 to 590a4 and the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c4 provided on the gaming machine front side of the rotating unit 500 are connected by optical fibers 590b1 to 590b4, respectively. Thereby, the light irradiated from LED2 in the internal section 590a2 propagates through the optical fiber 590b2, reaches the light emitting unit 590c2, and the light emitting unit 590c2 emits light (see FIG. 163 (a)). Similarly, the light emitting units 590 c 1, 590 c 3, and 590 c 4 emit light when the light emitted from the LEDs 1, 3, and 4 propagates through the optical fibers 590 b 1, 3, and 4.

  Similarly, in the right region, the light emitting units 590c5 to c8 are controlled to emit light by the LEDs 5 to 8 provided in the internal sections 590a5 to 590a8. Details are the same as those in the left region, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 reaches the light emitting unit provided on the surface portion of the rotating unit 500 via the optical fiber (light guide path). Configured to do. Thereby, lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 can be controlled while the LEDs 532 are disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in the fourth modification of the rotating unit 500, as compared with the third modification described above, one LED 532 is provided in each of the left region and the right region, and the light emitted from the LED 532 is each optical fiber. A blocking member capable of blocking so as not to enter 590b is provided. As the blocking member, a known optical shutter made of liquid crystal is used, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5 V), and the passage of light is allowed by releasing the application of the voltage. As a result, even if one LED 532 is provided in each of the left region and the right region, the light emission control of each of the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, since the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the effect, it is possible to reduce power consumption and to suppress (prevent) problems caused by heat generation and the like.

  Moreover, since the amount of light passing can be adjusted by adjusting the voltage applied to the blocking member, the amount of light incident on each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 can be adjusted, and the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c8 can be adjusted. Light emission brightness can be adjusted.

  Specifically, a fourth modification of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the fourth modification as viewed from above such that the upper side of the drawing is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (b), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotating unit into left and right portions is provided at the central portion of the rotating unit 500. One region 590g1 is disposed. On the other hand, the second region 590g2 is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the right region divided by the central wall portion 590f.

  The LED 1 is disposed in the first region 590g1, and the LED 2 is disposed in the second region. In addition, optical fibers 590c1 to c4 for propagating light emitted from the LED 1 are connected to the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c4 in the first region 590g1.

  It is possible to block the light irradiated from the LED 1 in the first region 590g1 from being incident on each optical fiber at the connection portion where the first region 590g1 and each of the optical fibers 590c1 to c4 are connected. A blocking member 590e1 is provided. As described above, the blocking member 590e1 uses a known optical shutter made of liquid crystal, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5V), and the passage of light is allowed by releasing the application of the voltage. The

  The blocking member 590e1 can individually control the light incident on each of the optical fibers 590c1 to 590c1-4.

  As a result, even if one LED 532 is provided in each of the left region and the right region, the light emission control of each of the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, since the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the effect, it is possible to reduce power consumption and to suppress (prevent) problems caused by heat generation and the like.

  Next, in the fifth modification of the rotating unit 500, the blocking member 590e1 is removed from the fourth modification described above, and the LED 532 is a multicolor LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 is an optical fiber capable of propagating light of a specific wavelength, and is an optical fiber having a different propagating wavelength. Each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 8 has a large amount of attenuation even if light having a wavelength other than a specific wavelength is incident thereon, and cannot propagate. Accordingly, by controlling the wavelength (color type) of light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 that emit light are varied by changing the optical fiber 590b through which the irradiated light is propagated. be able to. As a result, it is possible to vary the light emitting section 590c that emits light only by changing the wavelength (color type) of the emitted light, so that even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, the light emission is not impaired. Afterimage display by light emission from the portion 590c can be performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the light emitting portion provided on the surface portion (front surface portion) of the rotating unit 500 is configured with a member (for example, a polarizing plate) that can transmit only light of a specific wavelength. The color emitted from the LED 532 inside the rotation unit 500 may be varied so that only the light emitting unit 590c at a specific location can emit light.

  In this case, lighting of the plurality of light emitting units 590c can be controlled by setting the color emitted by the LED 532 to a color combining a plurality of wavelengths.

  Thereby, lighting of arbitrary light emission part 590c can be controlled by lighting control of multicolor LED532 without using an optical fiber like the 5th modification mentioned above. Thereby, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, afterimage display by light emission of the light emitting unit 590c can be performed without impairing responsiveness.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), a prism 595d1 that refracts the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 disposed inside the rotation unit 500 to the openings (580a1 to 580a8) may be provided. Good. The light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 is refracted by the prism 595d1 and propagates to the openings (580a1 to 580a8). Here, the amount (angle) refracted by the prism 595d1 differs depending on the wavelength (ie, color) of the irradiated light. For example, light with a short wavelength (blue) has a large amount of refraction, and light with a long wavelength (red) has a small amount of refraction. Therefore, by adjusting the wavelength (namely, color) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the amount (angle) of diffraction (refracting) is adjusted, and light is emitted to any opening (580a1 to 580a8). be able to.

  In the rotating unit 500 described above, power for causing each LED 532 (LEDs 1 to 8) to emit light is configured to be supplied from the outside of the rotating unit 500. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a power supply unit (battery) may be provided inside the rotation unit 500 so that power can be supplied to each LED 532 from the power supply unit. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to connect each LED 532 to be rotated and the outside in order to supply power to each LED 532 of the rotation unit 500, the signal transmission mechanism 458 in the above-described embodiment can be eliminated. Wiring can be simplified. In addition, since the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be omitted, the maintainability can be improved, and problems due to the damage of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented.

  In this case, by configuring the power supply means (battery) to be contactlessly charged, each LED 532 can be driven to emit light even if the capacity of the power supply means (battery) is reduced. As a result, since the capacity of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, the power supply means (battery) can be reduced in weight, and the power for rotating the rotation unit 500 can be reduced. Further, since the energy required to shift the rotating unit 500 from the stopped state to the rotating state is reduced, the response when the rotating unit 500 is rotated can be improved, and the effect using the rotating unit 500 can be improved. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Also, a switching element (for example, a MOSFET) for controlling whether or not power is supplied to each LED from the power supply means (battery) (for example, whether the LED is lit) and a signal for the switching element are output. An MPU to be operated may be provided inside the rotation unit 500, and a control instruction may be transmitted to the MPU by wireless communication. Thereby, the signal line for controlling lighting of each LED can be made unnecessary. In this case, the driving power may be supplied from the power supply means (battery) also to the MPU and the switching element provided in the rotation unit 500.

  Furthermore, in the rotation unit 500 described above, a specific character or design can be perceived by the player as an afterimage by rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the afterimage may be displayed by repeatedly (vibrating) the rotating unit 500 up and down (or left and right).

  In addition, the rotation unit 500 described above arranges the LEDs 532 (or openings (lighting portions)) symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis (rotation center), rotates the rotation about the rotation axis, and controls the lighting of the LEDs 532. However, although it is configured to display an afterimage, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), an opening 580a that is controlled to be lit by light emitted from the LED 532 only in one direction from the rotation axis (rotation center) may be provided. Thereby, since energy required for rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, the response of the rotation operation can be improved, and the effect of rendering the afterimage display can be enhanced. Moreover, since the rotation unit 500 can be reduced in size, space can be saved.

  A rotating unit 500 shown in FIG. 178 (a) is obtained by dividing the rotating unit 500 in the first modification described above into only the left half. Specifically, the wall portion 580e on the right side of the page is the rotation axis (rotation center), and the LEDs 1 to 4 are disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis. And the light irradiated from each LED1-4 is reflected by the reflection member (half mirror) 580c1-580c4, and is transmitted to the diffusion plate which is not shown in figure provided in opening part 580a1-580a4. Thereby, lighting control of each of the LEDs 1 to 4 enables lighting control of the diffusion plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4.

  The rotation unit 500 is controlled to rotate about the rotation axis, and the LEDs 1 to 4 are turned on to display an afterimage display. Since the LEDs 1 to 4 are provided in the vicinity of the rotation shaft, the centrifugal force applied to the LEDs 1 to 4 when the rotary unit 500 is rotated can be reduced. Therefore, the LEDs 1 to 4 are damaged by the centrifugal force. Or error movement can be suppressed (prevented). Moreover, since only the wall part 580e will be arrange | positioned at the back side of each LED1-4, the thermal radiation efficiency of each LED1-4 can be improved, and the solder which connects LED1-4 will melt | dissolve by the influence of heat_generation | fever. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that there is a possibility of causing a contact failure.

  Note that the rotation unit 500 may be repeatedly operated (pendulum operation) along a trajectory that draws an arc. As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the space required for afterimage display by repeatedly operating on a semicircle-drawing trajectory, so that afterimage display can be performed even in a limited space, and game variations are increased. Can do.

  Furthermore, a case where a repetitive operation is performed in a semicircle and a case where a rotational operation is performed may be provided. Thereby, since the variation of operation | movement of the rotation unit 500 can be increased further, an effect can be heightened.

  Further, the shape of the rotary unit 500 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is not limited to a substantially rectangular shape, and may be a substantially square shape so as not to rotate. Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the rotating unit 500 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (b), a total of 64 openings 580 a 11 to 580 a 88 in 8 stages and 8 rows are arranged in the rotary unit 500 in the front view of the gaming machine. In the uppermost stage, a total of eight openings 580a11 to 580a18 are arranged in a horizontal row, and in the lower stage, openings 580a21 to 580a28, openings 580a31 to 580a38, openings 580a41 to 580a48, openings 580a51 to 580a58, The openings 580a61 to 580a68, the openings 580a71 to 580a78, and the openings 580a81 to 580a88 are arranged in order. By controlling lighting of each of the openings 580a, it is possible to perform a predetermined display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the uppermost openings 580a31, 580a41, 580a23, 580a26, 580a32, 580a37, 580a42, 580a47, 580a52-580a57, 580a62, 580a67, 580a72, 580a77, 580a82, 580a87 are turned on. By controlling to do so, the letter “A” can be displayed. Thereby, a predetermined display can be displayed without rotating the rotation unit 500.

  An LED unit 589 is provided on the left side of each stage where the opening 580a is provided, and LEDs 11 to 88 are disposed inside the LED unit 589 corresponding to each stage. Specifically, the LEDs 11 to 18 are provided corresponding to the uppermost stage where the openings 580a11 to 580a18 are provided. Each LED 11-18 is provided corresponding to each opening 580a11-580a18, for example, lighting of opening 580a11 is controlled by the light irradiated from LED11. Similarly, the openings 580a12 to 580a18 are configured to be controlled to light up corresponding to the LEDs 12 to 18.

  As a detailed structure, lighting of each opening 580a is controlled using the structure of the first modified example of the rotating unit 500 described above (a structure in which a light guide path is provided for each). Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structures of the second to fifth modifications may be adopted. In addition, it is good also as a structure of the well-known edge light system light-guide plate which makes the display part visible by diffusing the light entered from the side surface to the whole surface. As a result, there is no need to arrange an LED or the like as a light source on the back side of the gaming machine, so that the rotating unit 500 can be thinned. In addition, by providing a region where light input from the side is reflected to the front side and a region where light is not reflected, a specific character or design may be displayed only when light is incident from the side. By providing a plurality of layers in which light entered from the side is reflected to the front side, a plurality of forms of characters and designs may be displayed. For example, the characters and designs of the plurality of modes are arranged so as to increase in size in order from the back side layer, and are displayed as a moving image in which the characters and designs become large by making light incident in order from the back side layer. be able to.

  The position where the LED unit 589 is provided is not limited to the left side, but may be on the right side, upper or lower side, or both left and right. Thereby, unevenness in luminance can be prevented (suppressed) between the opening 580a far from the LED unit 589 and the opening 580a near. Furthermore, when arrange | positioning to both right and left, you may comprise so that the display which appears may differ with light emission of left and right LED. For example, a red LED is disposed in the left LED unit 589, and a blue LED is disposed in the right LED unit 589. Then, by displaying characters and designs (for example, the letter “A”) with the left LED, red characters and designs can be displayed, and with the right LED, blue characters and designs are displayed. it can. Further, by combining the left LED and the right LED to emit light, purple characters and designs can be displayed.

  Further, the LED units 589 may be provided on the left side and the upper side, and the opening 580a may be turned on when the left LED and the upper LED are lit. Specifically, a polarizing plate is provided so that purple is visible from the opening 580a, and a red color is emitted from the left LED, and a blue color is emitted from the upper LED. Purple light reaches only the opening 580a in which both the left LED and the right LED are lit, and the lighting of the light is visible. Thus, by providing one LED corresponding to each stage and each column and combining the lighting of each, it is possible to control the lighting of any opening 580a, it is possible to reduce the total number of LEDs, gaming machine Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Further, when light is incident on each opening 580a from a plurality of positions (for example, the left side and the upper side), the LED unit 589 is disposed at one place (for example, the left side), and the light emitted from the LED unit 589 You may comprise so that light can inject from several positions with a light guide path | route (for example, optical fiber etc.).

  A plurality of types of diffusion plates may be provided in the opening 580a. Specifically, a diffusion plate that is turned on by irradiating light from an LED provided in the LED unit 589 and a diffusion plate (or a blocking plate) that is not turned on are provided. Thus, by lighting one LED, it is possible to provide an opening 580a that is in a lighting state and an opening 580a that is not in a lighting state. That is, a display area in which a lighting position that is in a lighting state and a non-lighting position that is not in a lighting state is predetermined is prepared, and a predetermined character or design is obtained by irradiating the display area with light. Can be displayed.

  Further, the plurality of types of diffuser plates may be configured to have different lighting modes when irradiated with light. For example, the lighting color may be different, or a different pattern may be displayed when the lighting is on. Thereby, since the variation of the display mode displayed on the front side of the rotation unit 500 can be increased, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the opening 580a that is turned on may be turned on when light of a specific wavelength is irradiated, or may be turned on when light is irradiated from a specific angle. May be. Furthermore, the display area (lighting position and non-lighting position) described above is made of a material that transmits light (an acrylic plate having a specific area subjected to reflection processing), for example, the front surface of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 By arranging it on the side, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is not impaired at normal times, and a predetermined character or symbol is displayed only when light is irradiated from a specific wavelength or a specific angle. can do. Thereby, even if the display area (the rotation unit 500) is arranged on the front side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the effect by the rotation unit 500 can be executed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol display device 81. . Further, an effect integrated with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed. Thereby, since the variation of an effect can be increased further, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, it is natural that the displayed characters and symbols can be clearly displayed by making the interval between the openings 580a very small (for example, 1 mm). Furthermore, only one opening 580a may be provided, and only a specific area of the opening 580a may be controlled to display characters and symbols. Thereby, since the space | interval part of each opening part 580a which cannot perform lighting control can be eliminated, the displayed character and design can be displayed more clearly.

  In each control example and each modification described above, the drive control of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 and the lighting control of the LED 532 are executed by the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the main control device 110, or a separate control device may be provided. Alternatively, the drive control of the drive motor 456 may be executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the lighting control of the LED 532 may be executed by the display control device 114. Thereby, the control load can be distributed. Further, by performing the lighting control of the LED 532 by the display control device 114, it is possible to easily synchronize with the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 173. The fourth control example is configured to execute the continuous short reach effect used in the second control example described above with different control. Hereinafter, the continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example will be described. First, in the above-described second control example, when the winning information is put on hold based on the winning of the game ball as the continuous short reach effect, the variation type is deviated before the holding and the short-changing winning information is displayed. Based on the fact that they are continuously held, the deviation short fluctuation is changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation type of short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. Then, when winning information that is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball is put on hold, the short reach is set to be executed three times continuously as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning winning information that is missed is put on hold. In such a case, the player is expected to have a short reach execution number (continuous number of times) in the continuous short reach effect by configuring the short reach as a continuous short reach effect twice. , Was trying to improve the fun of the game.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, it is configured so that the symbols (hereinafter referred to as reach symbols) that are the reach that is stopped and displayed in each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect have regularity. ing. The regularity of the reach symbol will be described in detail later, but the game that is stopped and displayed in the short reach executed one change before the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the continuous short reach is more game It is constructed so that it does not become a reach design that is disadvantageous to the elderly. By configuring in this way, when continuous short reach effects are executed, in addition to the number of times short reach continues to the player, pay attention to the symbols (reach symbols) that are stopped and displayed at each short reach. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the execution of the continuous short reach effect, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as the effect target variation). In contrast, a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect is executed. This special effect will be described in detail later, but a running effect indicating that a continuous short reach effect is being executed is continuously displayed even during a change in effect target variation ( (See FIG. 167 (b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute short reach continuous effects as a series of continuous effects including effects to be changed, so that it is possible to provide effects that are easy to understand for the player.

  In addition, as described above, when configured to display an in-execution effect indicating that a continuous short reach effect is being executed for an effect target variation, a predetermined timing during the effect target variation, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, one second after the start of fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach effect. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, one second after the start of variation) as the variation pattern of the production target variation. Is configured to be settable. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partly changed with respect to the second control example described above, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. It is different from the part that was changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the flow of the continuous short reach effect executed in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous short reach production in the fourth control example. Specifically, FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram showing an example of special symbol variation when the continuous short reach effect is executed, and FIG. 165 (b) is a case where the continuous short reach effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. FIG. 166 and FIG. 167 are schematic views showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous short reach effect is executed. Specifically, FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the first short reach is executed as the continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 166 (b) is 2 as the continuous short reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example when the short reach of the time is performed. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third short reach is executed as the continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 167 (b) is a diagram showing three short reach effects as the continuous short reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example in case the 1st fluctuation | variation (production | presentation object fluctuation | variation) after reach is complete | finished.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), as the special symbol variation, an outbreak short variation B (see FIG. 68) with a variation time of 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as short out variation) is executed three times in succession, Subsequently, the continuous short reach effect will be described by taking as an example a case where super reach A (see FIG. 68) (hereinafter referred to as long fluctuation) is executed per 60 seconds of fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (b), when the first short deviation variation is executed as the special symbol variation, the third symbol display device 81 continues to the upper region Dm1 (see FIG. 132 (a)). “Continuous reach mode” is displayed as an ongoing display indicating that the short reach production is being performed, and “continuous reach once” is displayed as an execution number display indicating the number of reach executed during the continuous short reach production. (See FIG. 166 (a)). Further, in a short reach with a variation time of 2 seconds, a reach mode is displayed in which the third symbol is in a reach state one second after the start of the variation.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166 (a), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated concretely. In FIG. 166 (a), among the symbol rows arranged in the vertical direction in the central region Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, numerals are placed at the center positions of the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row. A symbol with “4” is displayed in a stopped state, and a so-called reach state in which the middle symbol row continues to change is displayed. In the upper area Dm1, the execution display and the execution count display are displayed as described above. Since the other elements are the same as those in the second control example described above, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 165, the description will be continued. When the first short reach is completed, the short reach (second time) and the short reach (third time) are then executed so as to correspond to the special symbol fluctuation short deviation fluctuation 2 and short deviation fluctuation 3, respectively. In this case, the number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is “continuous reach twice” (see FIG. 166 (b)) for short reach (second time), short reach (third time). ) Is updated and displayed as “3 consecutive reach times” (see FIG. 167 (a)). In this way, by displaying the in-execution display indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily grasp the current effect status. In addition, by displaying the number of times of execution indicating the number of times of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is easy for the player to reach the number of times of reach performed during the continuous short reach effect. Can be grasped.

  When the special symbol variation per length is executed after the short deviation (short deviation 1 to short deviation 3) of the special symbol variation set continuously three times (see FIG. 165 (a)), the third symbol display device In the upper area Dm1 of 81, the “continuous reach mode” being executed is continuously displayed and “continuous reach 4th” is displayed as the execution count display. Then, in the central area Dm2, a special reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 167 (b)). This special reach is a reach effect that is set so that the reach mode is displayed one second after the start of the special symbol variation.

  With this configuration, the reach mode can be displayed at the same timing as when short reach is performed (that is, one second after the start of the special symbol variation). It is possible to prevent the player from being noticed immediately after the start of the special symbol variation. Specifically, when an effect corresponding to a special symbol variation for a long period of time (for example, 60 seconds) is normally executed, the player uses the period until the reach mode is displayed to the player. The notice effect that suggests that the degree of expectation of winning is high. In addition, since the reach mode is displayed after the period for executing the above-described notice effect, the effect is performed to ensure a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) until the reach mode is displayed. If such an effect is executed after the end of continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3), the continuous short reach effect is displayed when the reach mode is not displayed one second after the start of fluctuation. There was a problem that it was noticed that it was the final fluctuation. Therefore, even if the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3) is a long-term special symbol fluctuation, the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, the special symbol fluctuation starts). It is possible to suppress the player from noticing that it is the final variation of the continuous short reach effect by executing the special reach in which the reach mode is displayed 1 second after being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167 (b), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in case special reach is performed is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 167 (b), the execution display and the execution count display are displayed in the upper area Dm1 even when the special reach is being executed. In the central area Dm2, the symbols with the numeral “1” and the symbols with “9” are stopped and displayed in a reach manner in the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row, The symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. When the symbol with the number “1” and the symbol with “9” are won (when the same symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be in a line), the jackpot game is granted. In addition to this, it is the symbol that is most advantageous for a player who is given a high probability state (so-called probability variation state) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit after the jackpot game ends.

  Here, the reach symbols set for each reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the fourth control example, in a plurality of reach effects that are executed during a continuous short reach effect, a reach symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than a reach symbol that has been stopped once is stopped and displayed during the same continuous reach effect. It is configured not to be. For example, in the short reach (first time) shown in FIG. 166 (a), a symbol with a numeral “4” (a normal symbol to which a probability variation state is not given based on hit) is displayed, and is shown in FIG. 166 (b). In the short reach (second time), the symbol with the number “1” (the probability variation symbol to which the probability variation state is given based on the win) and the symbol with the symbol “2” (normal symbol) are the reach mode (double In the short reach (third time) shown in FIG. 167 (a), the symbol (1) with the numeral “1” is displayed in the reach manner and shown in FIG. 167 (b). In the special reach, as described above, the symbol (probability variation symbol) with the numeral “1” and the symbol (probability variation symbol) with “9” are displayed in a reach manner (double reach manner).

  In this way, in the continuous short reach production, the reach design that is disadvantageous to the player than the reach design that has been stopped once is configured not to be stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach production. During continuous short reach production, it is possible to play a game while expecting both the number of consecutive short reaches and the reach symbols to be displayed in a stopped state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the fourth control example, similar to the second control example described above, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, it is a highly reliable effect that is a big hit with a high probability (about 85%). As a result of this continuous short reach production, the person pays attention to which symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) is won, rather than whether or not it is a big hit. Therefore, it is set as a reach design that is more advantageous to the player in the single reach mode in which only the probability variation symbol is in the reach mode than in the double reach mode in which the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol is in the reach mode, but not limited to this If, as a result of the continuous short reach production, the expectation level that is a big hit is not high, the double reach mode may be set as a reach design that is more advantageous to the player than the single reach mode.

  Furthermore, during the continuous short reach production, it is possible to suggest a mode of reach symbols (normal symbol, probability variation symbol, single reach, double reach) which is stopped and displayed at the next short reach. In this case, for example, a suggestion notification is executed using a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in short reach, that is, a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. Good. By configuring in this way, the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed within the short reach (variation time 2 seconds) are short enough that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbols (for example, 0.25 seconds). Since only the stop display is performed, it is possible to unambiguously notify the player of the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach. Thereby, the player can expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

  Further, during the continuous short reach production, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probability variation symbol or single reach, double reach) which is stopped and displayed at the next short reach is limited to the method described above. For example, partial information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes a pattern image, etc.) of a pattern aspect that forms a reach pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in advance or stopped. A plurality of symbols including a reach symbol (a plurality within a range not including all symbols) may be displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

  In addition, during the continuous short reach effect, the reach symbols that have already been stopped may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, there are a plurality of reach symbol sequences that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on the ease of winning or an order based on the benefits given at the time of winning), and any one of them is selected. Is set and continuous short reach production is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach production while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. Can improve the interest of the game.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 168 and FIG. 169, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that an effect reach symbol selection table 222da is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 168 (b), the details of the reach design symbol selection table 222da will be described. FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the reach reach selection table 222da for the effect corresponds to the determination result and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da, and the reach design type of the short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect. Is a table that is defined.

  This effect reach design symbol selection table 222da is a winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171) of winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) or a losing continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3010 in FIG. 170). In step S3152 in FIG. 172, it is referred to when setting the reach symbol for each variation (short reach variation) (see S4514 in FIG. 171 or S4614 in FIG. 172).

  Specifically, when the determination result is a probability variation and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “probability variation A” is selected. In this reach symbol type “probability variation A”, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as “normal symbol, single line” for “1”, and “normal / probability variation, double line” for “2”. "Is defined, and" 3 "is defined as" Probability variation, single line ". The continuous short reach counter 223be counts the number of fluctuations (reach execution count) of the continuous short reach effect, and the counter value “1” is the first reach (short reach (first time) of the continuous short reach effect. )). Thereafter, the counter value “2” indicates the second reach in the continuous short reach effect, and the counter value “3” indicates the third reach in the continuous short reach effect. Further, since the stop symbol counter 223da is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the reach symbol type “probability change A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 194”, the reach symbol type “probability variation B” is selected. In the reach symbol type “probability variation B”, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as “normal / probability variation, double line” for “1”, and “normal / probability variation, “Double line” is defined and “Probability pattern, single line” is defined for “3”. The probability that this reach symbol type “probability variation B” is selected is 95/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “195 to 198”, the reach symbol type “probability change C” is selected. In this reach symbol type “probability variation C”, “premier symbol” is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be “1” to “3”. “Premier symbol” is a symbol dedicated to continuous short reach (for example, a symbol imitating a whale character) that is displayed in a different display format from the symbol that is variably displayed due to normal special symbol variation. This is a symbol that determines that the most advantageous privilege is given to the player. The probability that this reach symbol type “probability variation C” is selected is 4/199.

  Next, when the determination result is normal and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “normal A” is selected. In this reach symbol type “normal A”, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as “normal symbol, single line” for “1”, and “normal / probable symbol, double line” for “2”. ”Is defined, and“ Normal / Probable Variation, Double Line ”is defined for“ 3 ”. The probability that this reach symbol type “normal A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 198”, the reach symbol type “normal B” is selected. In the reach symbol type “normal B”, “normal symbol, single line” is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be “1” to “3”. The probability that this reach symbol type “normal B” is selected is 99/199.

  Finally, when the result of the determination is wrong and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “off A” is selected. In this reach symbol type “out”, “normal symbol, single line” is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be “1”, and “normal / probable symbol, double line” for “2”. Is defined. If the result of the determination is incorrect, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is configured so that the short reach is not executed three times during the continuous short reach effect as in the second control example described above. No reach design is specified for “3”. The probability that this reach symbol type “off A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 149”, the reach symbol type “off” is selected. In this reach symbol type “outgoing B”, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as “normal symbol, single line” for “1”, and “probable symbol, single line” for “2”. It is prescribed. The probability that this reach symbol type “off B” is selected is 50/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “150 to 198”, the reach symbol type “off C” is selected. In this reach symbol type “outgoing C”, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as “normal / probability symbol, double line” for “1” and “2”. The probability that this reach symbol type “off C” is selected is 49/199.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the continuous short reach effect is executed with reference to the effect reach design symbol selection table 222da. Reach symbols are set in advance for each short reach variation. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a reach symbol notice effect for notifying a reach symbol that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach, and to improve the interest. In addition, when the reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach variation, the reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation is selected. Can be displayed reliably, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the reach design selection table 222da described with reference to FIG. 168 (b), the condition (rank) of the reach design to be stopped for each item is defined, and the selected reach is selected. Although the reach design corresponding to the design condition (rank) is selected at random, it is configured to be stopped and displayed as the reach mode. Specifically, it is stopped in the reach mode in the production reach design selection table 222da. It may be defined up to the “number” displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the details of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 169, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223 a is added and a stop symbol counter 223 da is added. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition to the same configuration as in the second control example described above, the winning information storage area 223a is continuously short when it is determined that a continuous short reach effect is executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170). Various information is set for each variation in which the reach effect is executed, and when the variation pattern command is received, the above-described various information is referred to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display contents to be displayed are determined.

  Specifically, the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171) executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) or the consecutive short reach effect setting process for winning (see FIG. 170). 172 (see S3251 in 172), when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed (S4511: Yes in FIG. 171 or S4611: Yes in FIG. 172), winning information corresponding to each short reach variation is stored. The reach symbol is set in the winning information storage area 223a (see S4512 in FIG. 171 or S4612 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach is stored in each winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the variation in which the continuous short reach effect is executed. The variation type of the production is set (see S4513 in FIG. 171 or S4613 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach performance is performed. There the winning information storage area 223a of winning information corresponding to the variation to be initiated are stored start information indicating the start of a continuous short reach demonstration is set (see S4614 in S4514 or Figure 172, in FIG. 171).

  Thus, the effect performed with respect to a some fluctuation | variation can be easily set by setting the effect information regarding a continuous short reach effect with respect to the winning information storage area 223a.

  The stop symbol counter 223da is a counter used when selecting the reach symbol of each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. The stop symbol counter 223da is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed, the value is incremented by two. Updated. It should be noted that by setting the value to be different from the above-described effect counter 223f, the effect to be set is obtained when the effect counter 223f and the stop symbol counter 223da are acquired and the effect is set. The bias is suppressed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, a winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is executed instead of the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139), and a variation pattern selecting process 2 (see FIG. 143). The variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 173) is executed instead of the reference). The winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is a winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see FIG. 171) and a losing continuous short reach effect in contrast to the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example. The difference is that a setting process (see FIG. 172) is added, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 170, the winning command reception process 4 (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command reception process 4 (S3010). When the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) is executed, the processes of S3101 to S3134 are executed as in the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example described above.

  When the process of S3134 is completed and it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than “19” (S3134: Yes), a winning continuous short reach effect setting process is executed (S3151). The reach effect setting process (S3151) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of S3151 is finished, this process is finished.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3133, it is determined that the current winning information is not a big hit (S3133: No), as in the winning command receiving processing 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example described above, and then acquired. When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than “1” (S3139: Yes), the detachment continuous short reach effect setting process is executed (S3152). A detailed description of the continuous short reach effect setting process (S3152) for detachment will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of S3152 is completed, the present process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the winning consecutive short reach effect setting process (S3151) executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151). The winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is a big win.

  In the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151), first, it is determined whether or not all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three are out of the short fluctuation type (S4511).

  In the processing of S4511, if it is determined that all the winning information from the current winning information up to the previous three are out of place and are not short fluctuations (S4511: No), this processing is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4511, when it is determined that all of the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three are out of the fluctuation type of short fluctuation (S4511: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect The processes of S4512 to S4516 described below are executed.

  First, in the process of S4512, “3” is set as the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4512). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a to be subjected to the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information from the current winning information to the previous three (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514.

  In the processing of S4514, the reach symbol of each variation is determined based on the reach reach symbol selection table 222da, set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4514), and then the value “1” of the continuous short reach counter 223be. "Is set in the winning information storage area 223a in which" "is set, start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect (S4515). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4516), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the consecutive short reach effect setting process for losing (S3152) executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous short reach effect setting process for detachment (S3152). This discontinuation continuous short reach production setting process (S3152) is a process for setting a continuous short reach production when the received winning command is out.

  In the consecutive short reach effect setting process for losing (S3152), first, it is determined whether or not all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous two is of the variation type of losing short fluctuation (S4611).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4611 that all the winning information from the previous winning information to the previous two is out of the way, and it is determined that there is no short fluctuation (S4611: No), this processing is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4611, when it is determined that all the winning information from the current winning information to the previous two is out of the short fluctuation type (S4611: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect Then, the processing of S4612 to S4616 described below is executed.

  First, in the process of S4612, “2” is set to the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4612). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a to be subjected to the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information from the current winning information to the previous two (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4614.

  In the process of S4614, the reach design of each change is determined based on the reach design selection table 222da for production, and is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4614), and then the value “1” of the continuous short reach counter 223be. "Is set in the winning information storage area 223a in which" "is set, start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect (S4615). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4616), and this process ends.

  Next, the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404). In this variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), in addition to the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above, the next variation (effect target) that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be becomes the upper limit value. The background command is set so that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed until the change).

  In the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), first, the same processes as S3501 to S3505 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above are executed. When the processing of S3505 is finished, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551). If it is determined in the process of S3551 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is not set to ON (S3551: No), the process related to the setting of the continuous short reach effect (the processes of S3552 to S3559) is skipped. The same process as S3506 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the two control examples is executed, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3551 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551: Yes), a start indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the current variation is started. It is determined whether the information is set, that is, whether it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552). The start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is obtained by the process of S4515 of the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see FIG. 171) or the process of S4615 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (see FIG. 172). It is set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the process of S3552, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: Yes), that is, when the variation pattern in which the continuous short reach effect is started is selected, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be. After adding 1 (S3553), a display short reach background command is set (S3554).

  This display short reach background command is a display during execution indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed (see FIG. 166 (a)), or an execution number display indicating the number of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect. This is a command to be output to the display control device 114 in order to display (see FIG. 166 (a)) in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed every time a new variation is executed until the display normal background command is output (until the continuous short reach effect ends). Is set so that the number of times is incremented by one. The update processing of the execution frequency display may be set by adding update information of the execution frequency display to the display variation pattern command set by the sound lamp control device 113, or a new display by the display control device 114. When the change pattern command for use is received, a process of adding 1 to the number of display times may be executed.

  When the process of S3554 is completed, the above-described process of S3506 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is not the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: No), it is then determined whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555). Here, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not 1 or more (S3555: No), that is, the winning information that still starts the continuous short reach effect in the state where the continuous short reach effect is set. Is stored on hold, the process relating to the continuous short reach effect is skipped, the process proceeds to the process of S3506, and after the process of S3506 described above is executed, this process ends.

  In the process of S3555, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555: Yes), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 (S3556), and the continuous short reach counter 223be It is determined whether the value is 1 more than the upper limit value (S3557). If it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not one greater than the upper limit value (S3557: No), the process of S3558 and S3559 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3506. After executing the processing, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3557 that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is one greater than the upper limit value (S3557: Yes), a normal background command for display is set (S3558), and the continuous short reach setting is performed. The flag 223bf is set to OFF (S3559), the process proceeds to the process of S3506, and after the process of S3506 described above is executed, this process ends. In this way, the continuous short reach effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 by setting the display short reach background command until the value becomes one greater than the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be. This can be displayed up to the first rotation after the end of the continuous short reach change, that is, the change corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short reach effect (effect change). As a result, it is possible to execute a series of effects with a plurality of deviating fluctuations updated so that short reach fluctuations are executed as continuous short reach effects, and the production target fluctuations.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, regularity is given to symbols (hereinafter referred to as reach symbols) that are reach-stopped in each short reach executed in continuous short reach production. It is composed. The regularity of the reach symbol will be described in detail later, but the game that is stopped and displayed in the short reach executed one change before the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the continuous short reach is more game It is constructed so that it does not become a reach design that is disadvantageous to the elderly. By configuring in this way, when continuous short reach effects are executed, in addition to the number of times short reach continues to the player, pay attention to the symbols (reach symbols) that are stopped and displayed at each short reach. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the execution of the continuous short reach effect, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as the effect target variation). In contrast, a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect is executed. This special effect will be described in detail later, but a running effect indicating that a continuous short reach effect is being executed is continuously displayed even during a change in effect target variation ( (See FIG. 167 (b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute short reach continuous effects as a series of continuous effects including effects to be changed, so that it is possible to provide effects that are easy to understand for the player.

  In addition, as described above, when configured to display an in-execution effect indicating that a continuous short reach effect is being executed for an effect target variation, a predetermined timing during the effect target variation, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, one second after the start of fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach effect. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, one second after the start of variation) as the variation pattern of the production target variation. Is configured to be settable. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed, the short reach fluctuations executed in the continuous short reach effect with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da in advance. It is configured to set the reach design. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a reach symbol notice effect for notifying a reach symbol that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach, and to improve the interest. In addition, when the reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach variation, the reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation is selected. Can be displayed reliably, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In this way, in the continuous short reach production, the reach design that is disadvantageous to the player than the reach design that has been stopped once is configured not to be stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach production. During continuous short reach production, it is possible to play a game while expecting both the number of consecutive short reaches and the reach symbols to be displayed in a stopped state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the fourth control example, similar to the second control example described above, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, it is a highly reliable effect that is a big hit with a high probability (about 85%). As a result of this continuous short reach production, the person pays attention to which symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) is won, rather than whether or not it is a big hit. Therefore, it is set as a reach design that is more advantageous to the player in the single reach mode in which only the probability variation symbol is in the reach mode than in the double reach mode in which the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol is in the reach mode, but not limited to this If, as a result of the continuous short reach production, the expectation level that is a big hit is not high, the double reach mode may be set as a reach design that is more advantageous to the player than the single reach mode.

  Furthermore, during the continuous short reach production, it is possible to suggest a mode of reach symbols (normal symbol, probability variation symbol, single reach, double reach) which is stopped and displayed at the next short reach. In this case, for example, a suggestion notification is executed using a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in short reach, that is, a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. Good. By configuring in this way, the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed within the short reach (variation time 2 seconds) are short enough that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbols (for example, 0.25 seconds). Since only the stop display is performed, it is possible to unambiguously notify the player of the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach. Thereby, the player can expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

  Further, during the continuous short reach production, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probability variation symbol or single reach, double reach) which is stopped and displayed at the next short reach is limited to the method described above. For example, partial information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes a pattern image, etc.) of a pattern aspect that forms a reach pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in advance or stopped. A plurality of symbols including a reach symbol (a plurality within a range not including all symbols) may be displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

  In addition, during the continuous short reach effect, the reach symbols that have already been stopped may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, there are a plurality of reach symbol sequences that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on the ease of winning or an order based on the benefits given at the time of winning), and any one of them is selected. Is set and continuous short reach production is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach production while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. Can improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, the fourth control example described above is configured to execute an effect that suggests the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player using the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed by the short reach. The player may be configured to indicate the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player using a symbol other than the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed by the short reach.For example, the type of the symbol that is stopped and displayed last is the continuous short reach. You may make it suggest the result of production. Even in this case, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the same effect as in the present control example can be obtained by setting in advance a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the short reach variation in advance. be able to.

  In addition, when the arrangement of symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement shifted by one frame from the reach mode (so-called chance eyes)) In the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for notifying a plurality of chances (for example, the chance of a single reach one frame shift and the chance of a double reach one frame shift, the same chance) The chance that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a Y shape is set, and instead of the reach mode of the fourth control example, the chance mode may be used, or the reach mode and the chance mode are combined. The expected degree of advantage for the player may be set in stages, and the continuous short reach effect may be executed.

  In the fourth control example, in the case of continuous short reach production, when the result of continuous short reach production is win, the number of short reach executed continuously is 3 times, and the result of continuous short reach production is out of place. However, the number of times of short reach executed continuously is set to two times, but the number of times of short reach executed in continuous short reach production may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to set the number of short reach times to be executed more in the case where the result of the continuous short reach effect is a win than in the case of a miss. Thereby, even when the short reach number is set by lottery, it is possible to execute an effect that the higher the number of consecutive times, the higher the expected degree per hit.

  In the fourth control example, the condition that the continuous short reach effect is executed is that the short deviation of 2 seconds as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is continuously set a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so as to satisfy the condition even when a variation with a long variation time is set. In this case, it is possible to execute the same effect as in the present control example by configuring so that the same effect as the short reach is executed a plurality of times in one fluctuation pattern.

  Specifically, in the winning command receiving process, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the winning command receiving process is completed before (one preceding) the winning command that is the target of the determination. The variation time information of the winning information stored in the information storage area 223a is extracted. Then, a pseudo short reach effect pattern in which the short reach effect is executed a plurality of times within the change time (for example, 15 seconds) set in the change time information is set. In this case, for example, as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds, a variation pattern in which the first pseudo deviation variation (9 seconds) and the pseudo short reach variation (2 seconds) are executed three times, and the second pseudo variation variation (11 seconds). ) And a variation pattern in which the pseudo short reach variation (2 seconds) is executed twice, and a variation pattern in which the third pseudo outlier variation (13 seconds) and the pseudo short reach variation (2 seconds) are executed once are prepared in advance. In addition, in the winning command reception process, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed, a variation pattern corresponding to the set number of short reach is set. By comprising in this way, even if it is in the state where a lot of winning information (holding ball) is not accumulated, a continuous short reach production can be performed suitably and a production effect can be heightened.

  In the fourth control example, a continuous short reach effect is executed using a special symbol variation time, but other periods (waiting period, winning game period, etc.) are used ( You may comprise so that continuous short reach production may be performed in combination. For example, an effect similar to that of short reach may be configured to be executed using a jackpot ending period. Thereby, it is possible to execute the continuous short reach effect even for the first rotation after the big hit.

  In this case, when a plurality of winning information that has been won in the jackpot is set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed first and after the jackpot game ends The continuous short reach effect is executed using the special symbol variation set up to the special symbol variation corresponding to the next jackpot.

  Specifically, when the winning information won for the second jackpot is set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, the winning information won with the first jackpot Based on the calculation result and the number of short reach executed in continuous short reach production, the interval (the number of special symbol changes executed between winning information corresponding to two jackpots) is calculated. An effect mode of a short reach effect executed during the game ending period is set. Then, the short reach effect of the effect mode set in the ending period of the jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, a series of continuous effects (continuous short) using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol change period executed after the jackpot game ends (strike the jackpot game period and the special symbol change period) Reach production) can be executed. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot game ends (for example, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol change for the second rotation), even if the next jackpot is won, the continuous effect (continuous short reach effect) is preferably executed. Can do.

  In the case of using the above-described configuration, if the next jackpot is won in the first special symbol change after the jackpot game ends, a special short reach effect that is executed during the ending period of the previous jackpot game is special. It is good to make it a specification (for example, a premiere symbol appears) and to give a special feeling to the player. Thereby, in addition to the joy that was won in succession, the player can be given joy by executing a special performance.

  In the above-described example, the example using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends is shown, but other than that, for example, the special symbol variation that becomes the jackpot and the jackpot You may comprise so that a continuous short reach effect may be performed using the opening period of a game. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute a continuous short reach effect using a plurality of winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is won by the jackpot A continuous short reach effect may be set when setting the.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) for the special symbol variation won in the jackpot, the special symbol variation time and the opening period of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter Are used to set a variation pattern in which a continuous short reach effect is executed. Thus, the continuous short reach effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 across the timing at which the special symbol indicating winning is stopped and displayed (timing at which the big hit game is started). The type of jackpot game being executed this time is notified by the result of the continuous short reach effect that ends during the opening period. By configuring in this way, the process of changing the variation pattern for the plurality of winning information set in the winning information storage area 223a (the process of setting a continuous effect based on the so-called prefetching process) is not executed. Continuous production can be executed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to execute the above-described continuous short reach effect during the jackpot game interval period, and using a single jackpot game, it is possible to execute an effect that makes you think that you have won multiple jackpots. Good. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, 16 round jackpot) and a jackpot disadvantageous to the player (for example, eight round jackpot) are set as the types of the jackpot game, A continuous short reach effect is executed during the interval set between the eighth and ninth rounds. Then, when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a predetermined result (a winning pattern is aligned), an effect during the jackpot game that makes it appear that a new jackpot game has been executed is executed from the ninth round. Thereby, the player can be made to think that a plurality of jackpot games have been won, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described example, a game machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, 16 round jackpot) and a jackpot disadvantageous to the player (for example, eight round jackpot) are used as the type of the jackpot game is used. In addition to the above jackpot game, in addition to the above jackpot game, in the case of a specific determination result set as a part when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be out, In a gaming machine having a bonus game (for example, small hits) that opens a variable winning means that is opened so that it can be entered for a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds), the effect mode of the jackpot game is changed to the first half effect mode and the second half. It is divided into production modes, the first half production mode is set in the same way as the small game performance mode, and the continuous short reach production is performed using the period (interval period) after the end of the first half production mode. Line and may be configured to perform a late representation embodiment when the result of a continuous short reach demonstration is a predetermined result. Thus, it is difficult to determine whether a small hit game is being executed for the player or whether the first half effect mode of the big hit game is being executed, and is executed after the continuous short reach effect executed after the first half effect mode. This second half production mode can be thought of as the start of a new jackpot game.

  In addition, various periods described above (ie, a period that spans multiple special symbol fluctuations, a period that spans a jackpot (small hit) game and a special symbol variation that is executed after the jackpot (small bonus) game ends, a jackpot A period of striking between the special symbol changes won in (Small Bonus) and the jackpot (Small Bonus) game start period in which the jackpot (Small Bonus) game is executed, the period of being played in the Jackpot (Small Bonus) game) It is good to comprise so that multiple short reach effects can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to share the effect data of the effects executed in various periods, to reduce the capacity of the effect data, and to execute the effects that do not give the player a sense of incongruity Can do.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light from the light object And a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device being disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front surface being formed as a convex curved surface, and a light transmissive material A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a light object and an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) A gaming machine including a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible from the player, the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the sensor device is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device emits light through the open part on the side of the decorative member and receives the reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object, and the sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The farther it is arranged from the part (retracted to the back side), the harder it is to be seen by the player, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is open on the side of the decorative member. The closer it is to the player, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the player can easily see it. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and includes a front member made of a light transmissive material, the sensor device emits light. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light from the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed away from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is less visible to the player, A detectable range can be secured. Since the front member is made of a light transmissive material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the reflection angle (reflection angle) is set to a more acute angle near the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each of the reflections) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which the object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the reflected light from the object is reflected by the front surface of the front member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that a thickness dimension of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the front member is set to a substantially constant thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as a curved surface, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured. Moreover, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed so as to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the periphery of the front member on the front side of the second portion. A gaming machine A3, which is arranged at a position where

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side of the second part. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the 2nd part of the periphery of a front member is located in the back side rather than a 1st part, the curvature of a front member can be enlarged in the limited space by that much.

  The first part of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or on the front side of the back of the game board, and the second part of the front member is more than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is disposed at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or at the front side of the back of the game board. It can suppress more reliably that a displacement member interferes with a 1st part, and can enlarge the displacement member by that much. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be made light accordingly. Easy to use as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to ensure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a center frame disposed at an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the gaming board and the back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member to be rotated; and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is coupled to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second part (front member) can block it, so that the blown-off dust or dust is emitted from the sensor device. -It is possible to suppress a rise in the light receiving optical path and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. A gaming machine A6.

  Here, in the center frame stage, it is conventionally known that a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around from the standing front end of the back wall standing from the stage to the front side or is folded by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Affects the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the back wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the stage, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined distance from an inner edge or a center frame in the opening of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in either the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval between the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board), and the influence of the wind can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the launcher and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively fast. Compared to a moving sphere, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the periphery of the front member. A gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed on the upper side. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least downward from the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the front member substantially faces the player's face (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, the light from the fluorescent lamp and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be deteriorated (the light of a fluorescent lamp or other game machine is reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction points at least below the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. In other words, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, it can be suppressed that such light is reflected toward the player. It can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the liquid crystal display device deteriorates.

  In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the horizontal component increases as the front face is set to a constant value and is located upward in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed as at least a curved surface. The air is heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) because the horizontal component increases as the front surface located in the vertical direction increases. Can be raised along the rear surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is communicated between the first portion of the front member (the gap between the game board and the rear side of the front member and the front side (predetermined). ))) To the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<About the concept of the invention using the sorting apparatus 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine that includes a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass and in which a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening that is formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the pitching direction of the ball (position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction, and an extended passage that extends while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where the passage and the extended passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. And the opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other.

  That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect is a position where the sphere flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes its direction and starts rolling in the extension direction of the extension passage. A ball following the ball is easy to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since an opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball is used as the side wall. It can be difficult to press, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and is formed on the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Therefore, even when a sphere following the preceding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the left and right sidewalls, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extending passage. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage is formed on the side wall of the extended passage.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extending passage. An inclined surface is formed on the side wall on the back side when the sphere rolls, and is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage, so that the sphere flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. Thus, when starting rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, such a sphere can be quickly rolled using the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easier to roll the preceding sphere before the following ball catches up, and the sphere rolls along the extending direction of the extension passage by the following ball. Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the back side), the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, or a combination of these. Further, the downward slope angle of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the downward inclination angle of the extending passage over the entire inclined surface, and the downward slope angle at least at a part of the inclined surface is extended. If the angle is larger than the downward inclination angle of the passage, it is sufficient.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, a portion where an opening is formed) ) Is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a ball clog occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the ball clogged in the bent part on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface A gaming machine B6 that is formed in a range including

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. Therefore, when the sphere that flows down (falls) down the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the sphere can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B7, which is disposed on the front side of the board, and wherein the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a region where at least the vertical passage intersects the extended passage (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) among the bent portions of the passage member is a game. Since the opening is formed on the front side of the board and has a size that allows the passage of the sphere, the occurrence of clogging of the sphere can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening. A form in which the preceding sphere is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening, and the clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball pushes the leading ball against the center of the opening is formed, the leading ball is moved from the opening to the outside of the passage member (on the front side of the game board). The game area can be discharged, and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted into the opening. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this way, an opening is formed with a size that allows passage of the ball, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be reduced. It can be made to flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball flowing from the upstream to the passage member from the bent portion, the ball flowing from the opening to the passage member is also used as the winning opening. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 7, a lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extending passage by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall and the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out from the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside in the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, and is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned on the outer side in the width direction of the game area, and the bent portions in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between the two.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult for the ball clogging to occur in the bent portion. The downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion. .

  The gaming machine B9 is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is on the front side of the game board. A gap that allows at least a ball to pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member that is disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange the members corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is lowered, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device. In addition, since the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. It is necessary to provide an outlet on each side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult to cause ball clogging in the bent portion. The angle of the downward inclination of the passage can be reduced (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, it is possible to raise (increase) the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the gaming area). This is an arrangement that is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, can only be achieved by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the main body member transmits a light from the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through-holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotational direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting unit is exposed, the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) provided with the light emitting means is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

  Accordingly, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is housed in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported on a base member (not yet filed at the time of filing this application). Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visible and the appearance is not impaired. Moreover, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member is visible, the interest is enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem has been found that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the IC / capacitor that controls them are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means, IC / capacitors operate cannot be cooled sufficiently, the solder will melt. There is a risk of poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member includes a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction, so that when the main body member is rotated, the main body member is removed from the plurality of through holes. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side open, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently removed from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is closer to the end in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 that is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is a long shape along the diameter direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can flow to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and around the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotational speed is low at and around the rotating shaft, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the through hole in the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using centrifugal force (the rear surface at and around the rotating shaft) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the outside air taken in is made to flow to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward at the time of rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) be able to. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft.

  In this case, when the front wall that forms the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (when rotating) Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the outside in the radial direction changes direction toward the back side is substantially a right angle, vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, the front wall that forms the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction. The angle of the portion where the air flowing toward the outer side (radially outward) can gradually flow toward the back side and the direction of the air flowing toward the end in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction) changes toward the rear side. Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of vortices in such a portion can be suppressed, and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has an opening area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft and the rotating shaft is larger than an opening area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Therefore, using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation, the air inside the main body member flows to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation), and from the back side on the radially outward side. By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking-in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. As a result of the rotation, it is possible to suppress disturbance of the outside air on the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of a flow in the rotating direction). As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member includes a shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back surface side to the back surface side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter reduced from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be smoothed, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, since it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board is accommodated in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or a surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board has a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently sprayed onto the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is the posture in which the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension in the front view of the main body member (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction). ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side.

  Any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, comprising a smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is made to stand out. Can do. Moreover, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while hiding the rotary display device with smoke, and the effect effect by light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, and it is difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  As a smoke generator, for example, a type in which aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), and liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor in the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained and a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting to the front side And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and the front of the liquid crystal display device And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained easily) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is easy to make the light emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke and make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A base member; a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member; and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is at least the In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in the state of being disposed at the first position, the rotation member that is rotatably supported on one of the base member or the body member and the body member are disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so that the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement direction at the time and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

  Here, a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, the main body member includes: There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle against the base member as the displacement member is displaced. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member to suppress the rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the main body member and the base member and is urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member and on the other of the main body member or the base member. An engagement member disposed, and utilizing the displacement of the main body member relative to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is retracted against the urging force of the urging means, and the main body When the member is disposed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displace the main body member from the first position toward the second position). There is a problem in that it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and a driving force necessary for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member that is pivotally supported by one of the base member and the main body member, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in contact with the main body member in the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member makes it possible to It is possible to suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member by restricting the general displacement. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other, the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second position from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the abutting member contacts the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed, and the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, the vibration damping function can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the main body member to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. This is because wear and failure of various devices installed, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising a facing member that is opposed to the abutting member and is opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, since the counter member is disposed so as to face the abutting member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member due to rattling, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form which can displace the rotating member in the radial direction, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in a radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than one of the insertion holes of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. The form etc. which are made are illustrated.

  The gaming machine D3 includes a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member, and the rotating member is formed from an elastic body in a cross-sectional annular shape having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member When the rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to rattling with respect to the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated using the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). It is possible to easily hold the member more firmly. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed using the elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. There is no need to form the shaft, and the shaft can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5, wherein the gaming machines D5 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are disposed on one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member of the pair of rotating members is the first one. Since they are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when they are arranged at one position, the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member while suppressing the driving force required to displace the main body member relative to the base member Shaking of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, and only one rotating member is contacted with the contact member. If the rotating member rotates, the abutting member may tilt, and the tilting of the abutting member accompanying the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacing member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval, so that the abutting member contacts the pair of rotating members at two positions with a predetermined interval. Therefore, it can contact | abut without rotating a rotation member, and it can suppress that a contact member inclines. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is on the side that receives the rotating member when the main body member is disposed at the first position on the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is formed at the end.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is arranged when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the abutment surface is formed at the end portion on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is used, The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member, and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively high. Since it is not necessary to dispose a bulky rotating member, the main body member can be reduced in weight, and the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Moreover, when suppressing the shakiness with respect to the base member of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the shading can be easily suppressed by reducing the weight of the main body member on the vibration source side.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation surface of the displacement member is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member And a rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively, and a gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation shaft of the displacement member swings like a circle). It is vibrated in the mode (mode) to be made. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, so that the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotation member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force necessary for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the driving device includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces between the first position and the second position, The transmission means includes a rotating member that is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means, and a crank member having a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove for sliding, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove so that the second shaft is rotated about the center of rotation and the main body member is moved along with the rotation. In a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the shakiness of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel. Therefore, if the shaky direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member is likely to rotate with respect to such a direction. The effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member is hardly exhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by the displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead point) can be formed. That is, shakiness of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the direction of rattling of the main body member is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead points. By forming, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the restriction unit 490 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface of the main body member. The gaming machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, a rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting unit is directed to the front side (player side)). Therefore, the outer shape in the front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. And the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, and thus suppresses the outer shape of the main body member in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed. It can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is positioned so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the light emitting means and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. Can do.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. The gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are faced each other.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member is recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extends in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each of the plurality of concave portions, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of concave portions of the opposing member, and the front side of the rotary display device (game) To the person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by the respective concave portions, it is possible to clearly define the light separation of each light emitting means. As a result, the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall that partitions an end portion opposite to the front side of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes the end partition wall that partitions the end opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device. Since it is disposed at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. it can. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a gaming machine E6 is characterized in that a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed with a part of its inner surface as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from the opening of a recessed part is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness | corrugation of an uneven surface may be a surface which consists only of a convex (protrusion), and may be a surface which consists only of a concave (dent). The convex or concave may be extended as a strip or a groove. Further, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from an end portion on the front side of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the concave portions of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is The gaming machine E7 is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front side end of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the recesses of the opposing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the concavo-convex surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The intensity of light can be increased. That is, when a concavo-convex surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front side end of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected by the concavo-convex surface, and the front side of the rotary display device ( The amount of light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is made smoother than the concavo-convex surface, thereby suppressing irregular reflection and the front side of the rotary display device. The light toward (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area where the uneven surface is not formed increases the cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary display device. Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be widened. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially away from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the length of the main body member in the direction along the rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is closer to the concave and convex surface disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the lightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) to the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the light emitting means arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, The light emitted from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to be brighter (brighter) than the light emitted from the light emitting means farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the concave and convex surfaces disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction increase the length dimension along the rotation axis of the main body member. The concave portion (light emitting means) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member increases the irregular reflection by the uneven surface (that is, reduces the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means). It can be visually recognized as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member that is covered with a front end portion of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the facing member and that is formed of a light transmissive material is provided. The gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing the end of the recess.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover that is formed on the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed from a light transmissive material. The cover member is provided with a concavo-convex surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion, and after irregularly reflecting light by the concavo-convex surface, the front side (player side) of the rotary display device ). That is, since the emitted light can be broadened, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like interposed member is provided between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting means, the plurality of recessed portions, and the like. A gaming machine E11, comprising a through-hole formed at a position to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-like interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions are passed through, the light of each light emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding concave portion, and is prevented from entering (leaking) adjacent concave portions. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure that allows the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from the two members of the opposing member and the interposed member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E11, the intervention member includes a seat portion that contacts the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can be easily incident on the through hole, and leakage from the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. Further, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through-hole, so that the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a cross-sectional circle having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Are arranged concentrically, a gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is passed through the through hole. It can be made to enter efficiently into a crevice via. Moreover, since the area contact | abutted to the light emission means can be ensured, it can suppress that the light of each light emission means leaks out of a through-hole. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the interposed member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the interposed member that faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  In the gaming machine E15, the interposition member includes a groove-like groove portion that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base portion of the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15, the opposing member includes a groove-like groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove portion extending along the base portion of the seat portion, the region recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means is secured. The space can be expanded to a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to the adjacent seat and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat part may be circular, and the adjacent seat part and the outer peripheral surfaces may be connected to each other. As a result, since the outer shape of the group in which the plurality of seats are connected is formed in an uneven shape, the rigidity of the interposed member is increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. Can increase.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Device 4700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass; and first privilege granting means that is disposed downstream of the passage member and that grants a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that a ball can pass through the opening, and a ball that has flowed out of the opening into the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. A gaming machine F1, comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the game passes.

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). A sensor device that detects the passage of the sphere of the passage member is disposed on the downstream side of the passage member. When the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the passage member only has a function of guiding the sphere toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for the arrangement is increased, while the game is provided with interest. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege is given by the first privilege granting means. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that the ball can pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening to the game area is formed to be able to pass through. And a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes, so that a form in which the ball flows out from the opening to the game area can be formed in the middle of guiding the passage member. Can pass a 2nd privilege provision means, a 2nd privilege provision means can provide a predetermined | prescribed privilege. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege giving means, but also the form that flows out from the opening to the game area, and further, the outflowed ball passes through the second privilege giving means. Forms can be formed and entertainment can be given to games.

  The second privilege granting means may be disposed at a position where all of the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the gaming area can be received, or depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the gaming area. Some spheres may be received and some spheres may not be received.

  Further, the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege granted by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different privileges.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the sphere is sent can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, if a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to stagnate. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  The gaming machine F2 includes a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. Characteristic gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When a ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the outflow mode, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance for the second privilege grant means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, at least the entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the gaming ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the spilled ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The connecting passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege giving means, so that the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while the passage member is being guided, When the 2 privilege grant means passes, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage, and the first privilege grant means can be passed. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the 2nd privilege grant means, the grant of the privilege by a 1st privilege grant means can also be performed, and the interest of a game can be raised.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is provided a distribution unit that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball into one and the other, and the passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distribution means and the other connected to the other of the distribution means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes sorting means that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided, Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, it is possible to make the balls enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the sorting apparatus 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member through which a ball can pass, the game machine has a game area formed on the front side, and the passage member has a ball entrance disposed on the front side of the game board, A gaming machine G1, wherein at least a portion of the downstream side of the entrance is disposed on the back side of the gaming board.

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). By using the passage (passage member), the ball that has entered the passage can be reliably sent to a predetermined position. However, when the passage is arranged on the front side of the game board, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is reduced accordingly. That is, the flow area of the ball in the game area is limited (reduced).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the passage member has the entrance at the front side of the game board, and at least a part of the passage member downstream from the entrance is arranged at the back side of the game board. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board can be secured accordingly. That is, it is possible to secure a sphere falling area in the game area.

  In the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance, is inclined downward toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board, and is disposed on the back side of the game board. A pair of inclined passages and a pair of second passages that are respectively connected to the downstream sides of the pair of inclined passages and that are at least partially disposed on the front side of the game board. A gaming machine G2 in which a winning device is disposed between the pair of second passages.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance and is inclined downward toward the one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board. A pair of inclined passages disposed on the back side of the game board, and a pair of second passages respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least partially disposed on the front side of the game board. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board (the flow area of the ball in the game area) can be secured by the amount of the inclined passage. Therefore, the winning device can be arranged between the pair of second passages below the entrance. In other words, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine G2 is impossible in the conventional product in which the passage member is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, and the inclined passage is connected to the gaming board like the gaming machine G2. This is possible for the first time by disposing it on the back side.

  In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the second passage is formed as a bent passage having a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the ball is sent (position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, if a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to stagnate. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bending portion, so that the plurality of balls pass through the bending portion in a continuous state. In this case, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the leading ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  In the gaming machine G3, the opening is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G3, the opening is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, so that when a ball clog occurs at the bent portion of the second passage, the glass plate is opened. By doing so, on the front side of the game board, it is possible to access the ball packed in the bent portion from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and a lower edge of the gaming area. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is provided between the portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and the lower edge of the gaming area. Since a passable gap is formed, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide out ports on both sides of the second passage. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board (a flow area of the ball in the game area) and reduce the number of parts, thereby reducing the product cost.

  In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the game machine includes an attachment member that is formed in a cross-sectional shape with one side open and is attached in a posture in which the open side faces the back of the game board. The gaming machine G6, wherein the inclined passage is formed between a back surface and an inner surface of the attachment member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the game machine G6 is mounted in a posture in which one side is formed in an open sectional shape and the opened side faces the back of the game board. Since the slant passage is formed between the back surface of the game board and the inner surface of the attachment member, the back surface of the game board can be used as a part of the slant passage, and the slant passage is formed. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Characteristic K group> (pending pre-reading effect)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied A determination unit; a display unit that displays identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit; a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit; and the identification information by the dynamic display unit. A dynamic display period determining unit for determining a dynamic display period for dynamic display, and based on the fact that the information is stored in the storage unit, an identification symbol is displayed on the display unit and displayed on the display unit When the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol is satisfied, the symbol display control means for changing the corresponding identification symbol to a different display mode, and the information stored in the storage means Based on a pre-determining unit that performs determination before the determination condition is satisfied, a specific condition determining unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on a determination result by the pre-determining unit, and the specific condition determining unit A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for changing a background display mode of a display area in which two or more of the identification symbols are displayed to a different specific background display mode when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a thing.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and a holding symbol corresponding to the number of the holding memories is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a determination is performed in advance on the information stored on hold, and an effect suggesting the determination result is determined in advance until a lottery based on the hold storage determined in advance is executed. There is one that executes an effect using a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved memory (a so-called reservation pre-reading notice effect) (for example, JP-A-2003-340038). In this reserved pre-reading notice effect, for example, an effect that suggests a preliminary determination result to the player is performed by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect that suggests a prior discrimination result is executed using a reserved symbol corresponding to the pre-determined reserved memory, so that the player is interested in the reserved symbol for which the effect has been executed. Although it was possible to have it, there was a problem that the player's interest in other reserved symbols diminished and the game got tired early. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine K1, information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored by the storage unit. The information stored in the storage unit is determined by the determination unit when the determination condition is satisfied, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, and the identification information is displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. It is displayed dynamically. And the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Based on the information stored in the storage unit, the identification symbol is displayed on the display unit, and when the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol displayed on the display unit is satisfied, the corresponding identification symbol is controlled by symbol display control. The display mode is changed by the means, and the determination is performed by the prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the storage means. In addition, when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is different specific background display The specific effect to be varied in the form is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  Thereby, since the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is changed to the specific background display mode based on the determination result by the prior determination unit, the specific condition is established by the prior determination unit. It is difficult for the player to specify the identification information for which the determination is made, and it is possible to give interest to the identification symbol for the area where the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect including at least the display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means including at least the display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

  Thereby, since the specific effect is executed including at least the display area where the identification symbol is displayed, there is an effect that the determination result corresponding to the identification symbol displayed to the player can be made more interested. is there.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for all display areas where the identification symbols are displayed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect is executed for all display areas where the identification symbol is displayed, so the specific effect is displayed when the identification symbol is not displayed. Even when the game is started, there is an effect that the player can have an expectation for the identification symbol displayed thereafter.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is an end condition determining unit that determines whether an end condition for ending the specific effect is satisfied, and the specific effect execution ending unit is configured so that the end condition is determined by the end condition determining unit. When it is determined that the game is established, the execution of the specific effect is terminated.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific effect is continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game machine K4 continues until the end condition is satisfied by the player. There is an effect that interest can be given to the displayed identification symbol.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the specific effect executing means displays a display area in which the identification symbol is displayed in a first specific background display mode when the specific condition is satisfied, and the identification symbol is A gaming machine K5, wherein a display area in which the identification symbol that is not displayed is displayed is displayed in a second specific background display mode different from the first specific background display mode.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 to K4, the player is made to distinguish between the identification symbols that may have been determined to have established the specific condition by the prior determination means and the identification symbols that are not. It is possible to provide an interest in a limited range of identification symbols among the identification symbols displayed to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, when the identification symbol is displayed in the display area displayed in the second specific background display mode, the specific condition determining means is based on the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol. When executing the determination, it is determined that the specific condition is established with a higher probability than when the determination is made based on the information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed in the first specific background display mode. A gaming machine K6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5, since the specific condition is easily established, there is an effect that the specific effect can be easily displayed continuously.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit, A plurality of the dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, and the dynamic display mode storage unit stores the dynamic display mode as a type of the dynamic display mode. A gaming machine K7, wherein a plurality of specific dynamic display modes set as specific types are stored.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the type of the dynamic display mode is classified for each type, so that the player can easily understand the dynamic display mode There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K7, the prior determination unit determines at least a type of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. The specific condition determination unit determines whether the specific condition is satisfied with a predetermined lottery probability based on the determination by the prior determination unit when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine K8 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K7, when a specific effect is executed, a specific display is made with a dynamic display corresponding to any of the displayed identification symbols. Since the type of the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize earlier that the type of the specific dynamic display mode is executed.

  In the gaming machine K8, the first specific condition determination unit determines whether the type of the dynamic display mode corresponding to any one of the identification symbols displayed on the display unit is the specific dynamic display mode by the prior determination unit. The gaming machine K9 is characterized in that the establishment of the specific condition is determined by establishment of a predetermined lottery based on the determination of the type.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K8, the establishment of the specific condition is determined when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined for any of the displayed identification symbols. There is an effect that an expectation can be given to the identification symbol displayed to the player.

<Feature L group> (round production)
An effect based on a specific determination result is executed by a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player in the case, a plurality of the presentation modes including the first presentation mode are stored as the presentation executed by the presentation execution means. An effect storage means, an information storage means for storing information corresponding to the executed first effect aspect when the first effect aspect is executed by the effect execution means, and an execution condition Based on the establishment, the notification effect executing means for executing the notification effect for notifying the player of specific game information, and the notification effect execution based on the information stored in the information storage means. Gaming machine L1, wherein those having a classification setting means for setting a type of the notification effect performed by the stage.

  Here, it is suggested whether or not a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is given a gaming state (for example, a probable variation gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state after the winning game during the winning game There is one that performs an effect to be performed (for example, JP 2009-119006 A). In such a gaming machine, while performing a winning game, it is possible to enjoy an effect that suggests a gaming state after the winning game ends, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the game during the winning game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode of the effect executed during the winning game is determined by the type of the winning game, the player is in an early stage until the winning game is executed. There was a problem that caused the problem of getting bored. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine L1, information corresponding to the case where the first effect mode is executed as an effect based on the determination result by the determination unit is stored in the storage unit, and notification is made based on the information stored in the storage unit. Since the type of the notification effect executed by the effect execution means changes, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation not only for the specific determination result but also for the execution of the first effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the first performance mode is set to have a high ratio to be executed when the rendering based on the specific determination result is executed.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1, the first effect mode is set to be easily executed when an effect based on a specific determination result is executed. By being executed, there is an effect that an expectation can be given before the effect result is notified to the specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a privilege granting unit that grants at least one of a plurality of different privileges as a privilege given to the player based on establishment of the privilege granting condition, and a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting unit A bonus type determining means for determining the type of the game, wherein the notification effect is a notification that is executed based on the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means. Machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the notification based on the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means is executed by the notification effect, so that it is given to the player by the notification effect. There is an effect that the type of privilege can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine L3, the privilege type determining means may select a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state to be given to the player after the bonus game is executed. At least one of them can be determined, and the notification effect is executed during execution of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3, the player can know about the gaming state given after the bonus game during the bonus game by the notification effect, and is prevented from getting bored during the bonus game. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the type setting means sets a type of notification effect corresponding to the number of times the first effect mode is executed during a specific period. Machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, even when the first effect mode is executed and the bonus game is not executed, the bonus game is executed after that. Therefore, there is an effect that the value for the first effect mode can be increased for the player.

  In the gaming machine L4 or L5, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the execution period of the privilege game is set in the first period, and longer than the first privilege game The second privilege game set in the execution period is set at least, and the type determining means sets when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that the type of notification effect is variably set.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L5, the type of the notification effect is variably set according to the execution period of the privilege game, so the player can provide the notification effect according to the length of the privilege game. It is possible to provide an effect in accordance with a period during which the notification effect can be executed.

<Feature M group> (reach continuous production)
Main control means for executing main control of the game, and slave control means for executing control of the game based on a signal output from the main control means, wherein the main control means satisfies the determination condition A determination unit that executes a determination based on the determination, a determination information output unit that outputs a determination information signal based on a determination result by the determination unit to the slave control unit, and a determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the slave control means is for notifying the player of the determination result based on the determination information signal. In a gaming machine having an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode, the main control means is a type for determining type information of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means based on the determination result. An information determining unit; and a determination information signal generating unit that generates the determination information signal based at least on the determination result by the determining unit and the type information determined by the type information determining unit. When the first condition is established, the determining means determines one effect mode from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal, and the first condition When the second condition different from the above is established, the effect mode is set based on the type of the specific effect mode different from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal. A gaming machine M1 that is to be determined.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transmit a winning command from the main control device to the effect control device based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, the variation effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, JP 2010-233993 A). Thereby, the control load of the production control device is reduced.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the reception of the winning command, the special game machine corresponding to the winning command is received after receiving the winning command. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect cannot be changed, and a monotonous effect is provided to the player. There was a problem. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine M1, when the first condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined from the type of effect mode instructed by the main control means, but the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. If the second condition is satisfied, the production mode is determined from the specific production mode type different from the production mode type instructed by the main control unit. An effect of a type different from the instruction is executed, and the executed effect patterns can be varied. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine M2, the main control means, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means, storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, Prior determination means for executing determination before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and a prior determination signal based on a determination result by the prior determination means, to the slave control means Predetermination signal output means for outputting, wherein the sub-control means has condition determination means for determining whether the second condition is satisfied based on the received prior determination signal. A gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the establishment of the second condition is determined based on the prior determination signal before being determined by the determination means, so that a specific effect is performed over multiple times. By executing the effect corresponding to the type of aspect, there is an effect that the determination result notified by the effect executed thereafter can be notified in advance.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the effect mode includes at least a display effect in which identification information based on the determination result indicated by the determination information signal is dynamically displayed on a display unit. The determination result is notified to the player by a combination of symbols in each of the symbol sequences that are stopped and displayed in a predetermined region of the display means. A gaming machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, in the effect based on the determination result, a display effect that dynamically displays a plurality of symbol sequences is executed, and the symbol sequence in which the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed Since the determination result is notified by the combination, it is possible to make the player more enjoyable.

  In the gaming machine M3, the type of effect mode specified by the determination information signal is a type for at least two or more combinations of symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. A gaming machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, a part of the combination is designated by type in the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means by the main control means, so the symbol display by the sub control means There is an effect that the type selection can be facilitated.

<Feature N group> (Continuous notice)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the determination condition being satisfied A display unit for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit, and a display unit specific to the display unit. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, and a player as a gaming state after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means And a special gaming state determining means for determining whether to set a special gaming state that is advantageous to the game based on the information, the identification information comprises a plurality of different symbols. A determination result by the determination means based on a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, wherein the plurality of symbol strings are the dynamic display means. The first stop symbol sequence in which the dynamic display is first stopped when the dynamic display is performed, and the symbol stopped after the first stop symbol sequence and stopped and displayed in the first stop symbol sequence The reach formation symbol sequence that can be stopped and displayed in a reach display mode that is a symbol combination that can be the specific determination result, and the reach formation symbol sequence that is stopped after the reach formation symbol sequence The specific combination capable of forming a symbol combination for notifying the specific determination result corresponding to the symbol combination displayed in the reach display mode formed by the symbol of The gaming machine executes the determination of the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied before the determination condition is satisfied. Pre-determining means, specific condition determining means for determining the establishment of a specific condition established based on at least the specific determination result determined by the pre-determining means, and the specific condition determining means for determining the specific condition. When it is determined that it has been established, the first period from when the first stop symbol sequence is displayed in a stopped state until the reach formation symbol sequence is displayed in a stopped state spans multiple dynamic displays of the identification information. And a symbol display control means for controlling to be a specific period.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and a holding symbol corresponding to the number of the holding memories is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a plurality of lotteries until a lottery based on a pre-determined hold memory is executed as an effect suggesting the determination result is performed in advance on the information stored on hold. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35655).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the player could be interested in the lottery in which the result is notified by using the continuous effect, but other reserved symbols, that is, during the continuous effect. There is a problem that the player's interest in the lottery executed is diminished and the interest of the game is reduced. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine N1, when the specific condition is established based on the determination result by the prior determination unit, the first period from when the first stop symbol sequence stops until the reach formation symbol sequence stops is a plurality of times. Since the specific period spans the dynamic display of the identification information, it is possible to make the player interested in the stop timing of the symbol sequence and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine N1, the specific period is set in the same period as the first period in the identification information for a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1, the first period is set to the same period across the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times. There is an effect that it can be informed easily.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the symbol display control means, when setting the specific period by the symbol display control means, in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a determination result other than the specific determination result, The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that a second period from when the reach formation symbol sequence is stopped and displayed until when the specific result formation symbol sequence is stopped and displayed is set as a special period.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, when a specific period is formed, a special period is set in the dynamic display of identification information in which a specific determination result is not notified. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means.

  In the gaming machine N3, the special period is set in the same period as the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N3, the special period and the specific period are set in the same period, so that the player can more clearly understand that the specific condition has been determined by the specific condition determining means. There is an effect that it can be easily recognized.

<Feature O group> (Rank up with symbols)
An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition Determination means for executing determination, display means for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and display means When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the game is executed as a gaming state after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player and the bonus game executing means. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting unit that sets a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result, the identification information displayed on the display unit is a plurality of different diagrams. The combination of symbols for notifying the determination result by a combination of the symbols that are composed of a plurality of symbol sequences configured to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and for notifying the specific determination result As the specific symbol combination for notifying the player that the special gaming state is given is set, and the dynamic display means, when dynamically displaying the symbol sequence, the plurality of symbol sequences Among them, the first dynamic display mode of stopping and displaying the one symbol row after continuing the dynamic display after the one symbol row is stopped and displayed can be executed, The gaming machine has a special determination unit that executes determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied, and a determination result by the preliminary determination unit. A specific condition determining means for determining the establishment of the condition, and when the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means, the dynamic display means notifies the specific determination result different from the specific symbol combination Based on the specific determination result, the first symbol sequence is displayed in the first dynamic display mode in which the symbols other than the one symbol sequence are displayed in the symbol combination that is the specific determination result. A symbol display control means for causing the specific dynamic display mode to be displayed in the first dynamic display mode to be displayed in the first dynamic display mode as the specific symbol combination in the dynamic display executed after that, with the symbols different from the combination displayed. , A gaming machine O1 characterized by the above.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transmit a winning command from the main control device to the effect control device based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, the variation effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, JP 2010-233993 A). Thereby, the control load of the production control device is reduced.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the reception of the winning command, the special game machine corresponding to the winning command is received after receiving the winning command. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect cannot be changed, and a monotonous effect is provided to the player. There was a problem. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine O1, when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, so that the combination of symbols based on the specific determination result is not obtained. Even in this case, there is an effect that the player can expect that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

  In the gaming machine O1, the specific condition determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the prior determination unit as the specific determination result, and the symbol control unit The identification information is dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode until the dynamic display corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed in the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine O2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the fact that the specific determination result is the specific determination result to which the special gaming state is given is expected from the symbol displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the pre-determination means can determine the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means after the bonus game when the specific determination result is based on the information. Yes, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the specific determination result is that the special gaming state is not set, and the establishment of the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means, the symbol display control means In the specific dynamic display mode, one of the specific symbol combinations is dynamically displayed, and one of the symbol combinations based on the specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination is dynamic. A gaming machine O3 that displays a special dynamic display mode combined with a displayed state.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1 or O2, after the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the game machine O3 may be displayed in a symbol combination based on a specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination. Since combinations other than the specific symbol combination are also notified, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that makes the player extremely discouraged.

<Feature P group> (Mode change during hold notice)
An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the determination condition being satisfied When the determination means, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed on the display means, A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the user, a symbol display means for displaying on the display means a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means and before the determination condition is satisfied, Based on a pre-determination unit that performs a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied, and a determination result by the pre-determination unit Specific condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, and variable display means for changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied A game state determining means for determining one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states, and game information corresponding to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is displayed on the display means. In the state where the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the game information display means and the variable display means, the game information is changed to game information corresponding to the different game states by the game information display means. Specific symbol display means for variably setting the symbol display mode to a different specific symbol display mode. Gaming machines P1 to.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a plurality of production modes, and a mode switching production that can provide various productions by switching the production mode, and winning a game ball to the start winning opening The lottery executed on the basis of the information is configured to be able to be stored on hold multiple times, the determination is performed on the stored information in advance, and an effect that suggests the determination result is based on the pre-determined hold storage. There is one that executes a pre-reading continuous effect that is executed using a period until the lottery is executed (for example, JP-A-2015-16167). According to this gaming machine, when the state in which the mode switching effect can be executed and the state in which the prefetch continuous effect can be executed overlap, the effect is controlled so that only one of the effects is executed. , It is possible to suppress the production of a sense of incongruity.

  However, such a conventional gaming machine has a mode switching effect and a problem that an effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable when the mode switching effect and the prefetch continuous effect are executed in an overlapping manner. Only the control that prohibits the pre-reading continuous performance from being executed redundantly is executed, and the above-described problem has not been fundamentally solved. In addition, since control that does not execute an executable effect is used, there is a problem that the effect becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early. The object is to solve the above-described problems.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the game state is switched and the displayed game information is variably displayed as the corresponding game information, the symbol display mode is variably set to a specific symbol display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode of the symbol can be matched to the display mode corresponding to the game information displayed variably.

  In the gaming machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before being changed by the variable display means, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before the symbol is changed. Therefore, even when the gaming state is changed, the information in which the symbol is changed is displayed. There is no need to take over, and the control process can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine P2, the gaming machine P3 includes determination control means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination means based on the change to the specific symbol display mode.

  According to the gaming machine P3, by changing to the specific symbol display mode, the establishment of the specific condition is determined again, so that the opportunity to change the symbol changed to the specific symbol display mode can be given again. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the specific symbol display mode is variably displayed, a suggestion display mode that suggests that the symbol has been changed to the specific symbol display mode is displayed at a predetermined timing. A gaming machine P4 characterized by having suggestion display means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the suggestion display mode indicating that the specific symbol display mode has been changed is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that confuses.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the display before changing to the specific symbol display mode based on the determination condition of the information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode being satisfied A gaming machine P5 characterized by having a notification means for reporting a notification mode based on the mode.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode is started, the specific symbol display mode is changed. Since the notification mode based on the previous display mode is notified, the player can recognize the original display mode changed at the start of the dynamic display, and can easily play the game. There is.

<Characteristic Q group> (Light emission control of versatile lighter)
A decorative member having at least a first projecting region projecting from the support unit and a second projecting region projecting in a direction different from the first region; and a moving means for moving the decorative member; A plurality of light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the second projecting area of the decorative member, a movement control means for controlling the movement of the decorative member, and the plurality according to the movement control by the movement control means. A light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, wherein the light emission control means is arranged in a predetermined area of the moving area where the decorative member is moved in the first projecting area. The specific light emission control for controlling the light emission in a predetermined period unit in the predetermined area can be executed by the light emission by the light emitting means and the light emission by the light emitting means in the second projecting region. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that it.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (sub-display device) different from a display device (main display device) that displays a variable display of symbols, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There is also one that displays an auxiliary effect on the sub display device. In addition to the display such as a liquid crystal display device, a versatile writer or the like has been proposed as the sub display device (for example, JP-A-2015-51045).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a versatile writer is employed as the secondary display device, there are cases where the color and resolution of an image (afterimage) to be displayed are limited due to restrictions on the light emitting unit. That is, there is a possibility that it is difficult to suitably execute the light emission effect by the versatile lighter.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, since the light emitting means of the first projecting area and the light emitting means of the second projecting area control the light emitting mode in a predetermined period in the predetermined area, the different light emitting modes are overlapped in the predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that a predetermined region can emit light in various modes.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the movement control means is disposed in the light emitting means and the second protrusion area disposed in the first protrusion area corresponding to causing the predetermined area to emit light during the predetermined period. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized by executing movement control so that the light emitting means are moved to the predetermined areas.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the light emitting means arranged in the second projecting area are moved during a predetermined period. A predetermined area can be made to emit light in a light emitting mode by each light emitting means.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the afterimage is continuously displayed during the predetermined period when the light emitting means of the first protruding area or the light emitting means of the second protruding area is moved while emitting light in the predetermined area. A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that it is a possible period.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the movement control means moves the decorative member within a predetermined movement range with a predetermined movement pattern as one cycle, and repeatedly executes the movement pattern for a predetermined period. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, there is an effect that the light can be easily and continuously emitted when a predetermined area is emitted.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the period in which the decorative member is moved by the movement control means in the one movement pattern is a period shorter than the period corresponding to the time resolution of the human eye. Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q4, since the light emitted from the light emitting means is recognized as an afterimage by a person, there is an effect that light can be emitted in various light emitting modes.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the light emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units arranged in the first projecting region are different from the light emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units arranged in the second projecting region. A gaming machine Q6 that is capable of emitting light.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, there is an effect that the light emission mode displayed in the predetermined area can be configured to be seen in various emission colors.

<Feature R group> (Failure countermeasures)
It is advantageous to the player when a display means for displaying a game effect mode, an effect mode determination means for determining the effect mode to be displayed on the display means, and the specific effect mode displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, a notification effect execution for executing a notification effect for notifying a player of game information during a period in which the effect mode is displayed on the display means. And a movable effect executing means capable of executing a movable effect that hinders visual recognition of the effect mode on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the movable effect executed by the movable effect executing means is: The gaming machine R1 is executed so as not to overlap with a period in which the notification effect is executed.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Such conventional gaming machines include a plurality of display devices that are configured to be capable of performing various display effects by moving some of them. Specifically, another display device is moved in front of one display device, and a composite display effect is performed with a plurality of display devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 2007-185256).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, when some display devices move, the display content of the display device on the back side may be blocked by the display device on the front side. That is, there is a possibility that a problem that the display content of the display device cannot be visually recognized normally occurs.

  According to the gaming machine R1, since the movable effect is executed so that the movable effect and the notification effect do not overlap, the malfunction in which the notification effect is hindered by the movable effect and the player cannot be notified normally can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress game defects.

  In the gaming machine R1, based on the timekeeping means capable of timing even when the gaming machine is turned off, the obtaining means capable of obtaining timekeeping data timed by the timekeeping means, and the timekeeping data obtained by the obtaining means When the restriction determining means for determining whether the restriction condition for restricting the execution of the movable effect is satisfied, and when the restriction determining means determines that the restriction condition is satisfied, the movable effect executing means A gaming machine R2 having a regulation means for regulating execution of the movable effect.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the execution of the movable effect is regulated based on the posting data acquired from the time measuring means, so a regulation condition such as the number of times of execution for each time zone is set. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in the movable effect that is excessively executed and moved by the movable effect.

  In the gaming machine R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the restriction condition is that an upper limit number of the movable effects is set for every predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R2, since the upper limit number of times for a certain period is set in the regulation condition, it is possible to prevent the specific performance from being performed excessively and the production from being biased There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the notification effect displays at least a notification effect display mode on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R1 to R3, the notification effect display mode is displayed on the display means as the notification effect. This is advantageous in that the player can easily play the game.

<Feature S group> (mirror inside)
A decorative member having a supporting portion and having a protruding region protruding from the supporting portion, a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating toward the protruding region toward the supporting portion, and a light emission control for each of the plurality of light emitting means Corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding the irradiation light of each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the support portion to the protruding region. A gaming machine S1, wherein a plurality of guiding paths are formed, and the projecting region has a plurality of irradiation sections that irradiate the front side with irradiation light guided from the respective guiding paths.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (sub-display device) different from a display device (main display device) that displays a variable display of symbols, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There is also one that displays an auxiliary effect on the sub display device. In addition to the display such as a liquid crystal display device, a versatile writer or the like has been proposed as the sub display device (for example, JP-A-2015-51045). Here, a general versatile writer rotates a rod-shaped member containing a plurality of LEDs, and switches the light emission state of each LED according to the rotation position, thereby displaying a predetermined image from the light trajectory of each LED. It can be displayed as an afterimage.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it is necessary to continuously rotate a long and narrow bar-shaped member in which a large number of LEDs are arranged each time an effect using a versatile light is executed. There was a problem that failure was likely to occur due to the action of force.

  According to the gaming machine S1, by emitting light from the support portion to the projecting region, it is possible to cause each of the plurality of irradiation units on the projecting region to emit light. It is possible to reduce the increase in size and to reduce the burden on the support portion.

  In the gaming machine S1, the plurality of irradiating units are arranged such that adjacent irradiating units are arranged close to each other.

  According to the gaming machine S2, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged adjacent to each other, there is an effect that various display modes can be formed by combining the light emission modes of the plurality of irradiation units.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, at least one of the plurality of irradiating units is provided with a light emitting display means that makes it possible to visually recognize a predetermined symbol by emitting light. S3.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, a predetermined symbol can be visually recognized by emitting light, so that a novel display effect can be executed for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, movement means for moving the decoration portion within a predetermined movement range and movement control means for executing movement control for moving the decoration member by the movement means in a predetermined movement pattern And the light emission control means controls the light emission with a light emission pattern corresponding to the movement pattern.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the decorative member is moved, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light according to the movement pattern, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the movement control means moves the decorative member repeatedly in a period shorter than the time resolution of human eyes, with the predetermined movement pattern as one cycle. .

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is moved, the light emitted by the decorative member moved in the next cycle with the afterimage remaining. As a result, a variety of display modes can be provided to the player.

  Any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes. As a result, display contents have been diversified to improve interest (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, a determination condition Determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means based on establishment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specific to the display means Each of the information stored in the storage means and before the determination condition is satisfied, when the identification information based on the fact that the identification information is displayed is displayed. A symbol display unit that displays a symbol corresponding to the display unit, and a pre-determination that executes a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied And, based on the determination result by the prior determination unit, the specific condition determination unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied, and the symbol display unit when the specific condition determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied. Variable display means for changing the display mode of the displayed symbol, a game state determination means for determining one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states, and determined by the gaming state determination means The game information display means for displaying game information corresponding to the game state on the display means, and the game information display means in the state where the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means. When the information is variably displayed in the game information corresponding to the different game states, the feature of setting the symbol display mode to a different specific symbol display mode is set. It has a symbol display means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, wherein the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before being changed by the variable display means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, the determination control for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit based on being changed to the specific symbol display mode. It has a means.
When the gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is displayed in the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3 while being variably displayed in the specific symbol display mode, the symbol is changed to the specific symbol display mode. It has suggestion display means for displaying the suggestion display mode that suggests that it has been done at a predetermined timing.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the determination condition of the information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode is satisfied. Based on this, it has an alerting | reporting means which alert | reports the alerting | reporting aspect based on the display aspect before changing to the said specific symbol display aspect.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, one gaming state is determined from the plurality of gaming states by the gaming state determination means, and the gaming information corresponding to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means is the gaming information. Displayed on the display means by the display means. When the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means, and the game information is variably displayed by the game information display means as game information corresponding to a different gaming state, the display mode of the symbol is The specific symbol display mode is variably set depending on the specific symbol display means.
Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before the symbol is changed, so that the gaming state is variable. Even in this case, there is no need to take over the information whose pattern has been changed, and the control process can be facilitated.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is determined again that the specific condition is satisfied by changing to the specific symbol display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to give an opportunity to change the symbol changed to the symbol display mode again.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, a suggestion display mode indicating that the specific symbol display mode has been changed is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player is confused by changing the gaming state can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode Is started, the notification mode based on the display mode before changing to the specific symbol display mode is notified, and the player recognizes the original display mode changed at the start of the dynamic display. It is possible to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S219 Benefits game execution means S405, S505 determination means S602, S610 acquiring means S604, S612 storage unit S620 advance judging means S2206 symbol display hand stage S3010 particular condition determining means S3151 variable display hand stage

Claims (2)

Acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of the acquisition condition;
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means;
Discriminating means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a discriminating condition;
Display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
A symbol display means for displaying on the display means a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied;
Prior discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied;
Specific condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition based on the result of determination by the prior determination means;
In a gaming machine having variable display means for changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means when the specific condition determination means determines the establishment of the specific condition,
As the background mode of the identification information displayed on the display means, the first background mode in which the symbol is displayed and the second background mode in which the symbol is not displayed are a plurality of background modes including at least one of the background modes Background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining a background mode;
Background aspect display means for causing the display means to display a background aspect corresponding to the background mode determined by the background mode determination means;
When the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means, the identification information is dynamically displayed when the background mode display means variably displays the second background mode. And a specific aspect display means capable of displaying a specific aspect capable of identifying information relating to the symbol that has been variably displayed in the area.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images